HomeMy WebLinkAboutB08-0010 Project Manual Volume I (pgs 793-974)• •
rl
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL, INC. SECTION 08520
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Description: Aluminum windows are indicated on Contract Documents, and shall include work
necessary and incidental to proper completion and performance of the Work.
B. Included: Aluminum windows include, but are not limited to, following:
1. Design, engineering, detailing, fabrication and installation of work.
2. Architectural operable windows, thermally broken, for outdoor window units.
3. Anchorage to supporting structure, including providing anchorage devices, supports, fasteners and
like items to be built -in or attached to supporting structure.
4. Closures, covers, fascias, trim and flashing integral, adjoining or associated with work.
5. Sealants, fillers and gaskets, as applicable, at joints within work, and at joints between work and
adjoining construction.
6. Glass panels and accessory glazing materials associated with work, including devices and
anchorage required to retain glass panels in place.
7. Insect screens.
8. Protective and finish coatings.
nk
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents, and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. AA - Aluminum Standards and Data.
2. AA - Specifications for Aluminum Structures.
3. AAMA GSM -1 - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual.
4. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Glass Doors.
5. AAMA 607.1 - Voluntary Specification for Anodic Coatings.
6. AAMA 904.1 - 87 Voluntary Specifications for Friction Hinges in Window Applications.
7. AAMA 910 - Voluntary "Life Cycle" Specifications and Test Methods for Architectural Grade
Windows and Sliding Glass Doors.
8. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of
Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections.
9. AAMA 2605.2 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
10. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
AESI27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
18JAN08
08520 -1
K
11. ANSVAAMA 101 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and
Glass Doors.
12. GANA - Glazing Manual.
13. GANA - Sealant Manual.
14. ISO 3210 - Acid Dissolution Test.
15. NAAMM - Metal Finishes Manual.
16. USDOJ - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
17. Handicapped people accessibility codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
B. Performance Basis:
General: Descriptions and requirements indicated by Contract Documents establish basic
arrangements, visual concepts, profiles and sightlines of members, dimensions and modules of
units, performance, function, operation and like requirements. Within these limitations, work shall
meet arrangements, visual concepts, performance criteria and like requirements indicated by
Contract Documents, and include components not indicated but necessary for performance,
function, operation and like requirements and to be a complete system. Perform modifications only
as necessary to meet requirements of Contract Documents and to coordinate the work, subject to
acceptance by Architect. Variations in details and products shall not adversely affect visual
concepts, appearance, performance, strength and durability. Provide complete drawings and data of
proposed modifications.
2. Qualification: Contract Documents are intended to cover complete work and to outline performance
criteria and products required, but not to cover details of design and construction. Such details shall
be responsibility of manufacturer. Contract Documents do not invent or develop any part of work,
but have made only selections from choices made available by manufacturer.
3. Certification: Work shall be designed, certified, reviewed and inspected by engineer of Contractor
subject to minimum requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. General: Work shall meet performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents, including
requirements specified in this Paragraph and in other parts of this Section.
2. Performance Conditions: Performance of work shall include live loads, creep, shrinkage,
deflections, temperature variations, stresses, expansion and contraction requirements, seismic
forces, vibration, differential settlement and other like conditions meeting most stringent
requirements of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
3. Design Features:
a. Frame, Jamb and Glass: Each shall be in one plane respectively, except as otherwise indicated
on Drawings.
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -2 V )
18JAN08
4. Loading: Work shall withstand a minimum uniform pressure, both positive (acting inward) and
negative (acting outward), acting normal to plane and over gross area of surfaces, of uniform static
air pressure meeting requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements when evaluated
meeting requirements of ASTM E330, without exceeding deflection requirements:
5. Dead Loads: Withstand actual weight of systems, materials and components, including items
supported by work.
6. Ultimate Structural Loads:
a. Window Units:
1) Windows, including operable components shall withstand for duration of 10 seconds, 1.5
times required pressures and loads, both positive (acting inward) and negative (acting
outward), acting normal to plane and over gross area of surfaces, when evaluated meeting
requirements of ASTM E330.
2) At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage, and no permanent damage to
panels, support arms, actuating mechanisms, hardware parts, fasteners and anchors, or
damage making operable components not perform or be inoperable. Permanent
deformation of any framing, sash, and ventilator member shall not exceed 0.2 percent of
clear span.
b. Anchor Components: Anchor components shall withstand 2.5 times required pressures and
loads, both positive (acting inward) and negative (acting outward), acting normal to plane and
over gross area of surfaces, when evaluated meeting requirements of ASTM E330.
7. Deflections: For required pressures and loads, limit deflections and stresses to work as follows,
except restrict deflection further as required for performance and assembly of components:
a. Normal: For pressures and loads acting normal to plane of surfaces, deflection of framing
members shall not exceed L/175 of span length or 3/4 inch, whichever is least, and shall not
exceed flexure limit of glass or panel unit with full recovery of glazing and installed materials.
b. Parallel: For pressures and loads acting parallel to plane of surfaces, deflection of horizontal
rails shall not reduce glass or panel unit bite below 75 percent of design dimension and shall not
reduce glass or panel unit edge clearance below 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8 inch,
whichever is least, and shall not exceed limit of glass or panel unit with full recovery of glazing
and installed materials.
c. Connections: At connection points of framing members to supporting structure and anchors,
deflection of anchors shall not exceed 1/16 inch. Where connection points and anchorage are
not clearly defined, maximum anchor point deflection which is used to determine span of
element shall not exceed 1/16 inch.
d. Interaction Stresses: Stresses shall take into account interaction, including allowable values
established by standards and specifications specified in Paragraph - Codes and Standards, of
this Section. In no case shall allowable values exceed yield stress.
8. Permanent Deflections:
a. Framing: At 1.5 times required pressures and loadings, net permanent deflections of framing
members shall not exceed 0.2 percent of span length, and components shall not experience
failure and gross permanent distortion.
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -3
18JAN08
b. Connections: At connection points of framing members to supporting structure and anchors,
deflection of anchors shall not exceed 1/8 inch and permanent set shall not exceed 1/16 inch.
Where connection points and anchorage are not clearly defined, maximum and permanent
anchor deflection which is used to determine span of element shall not exceed 1/8 inch and 1/16
inch, respectively.
9. Movements: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements.
10. Twist: Twist of glass and panel supporting members, supporting full dead load, shall not exceed 1
degree between ends and center.
11. Building Tolerances: Work shall accommodate variations in relation to theoretical building lines.
12. Corrosion: Where dissimilar materials exist in a relationship or environment where galvanic or other
types of corrosion or deterioration could occur, provide adequate measures to prevent corrosion and
deterioration at places within and adjacent to work.
13. Glass Design Factor of Safety: Meet requirements of Section 08800 - Glazing for minimum design
factors.
14. Operable Windows, Architectural Class - Outdoor Work:
a. General: Meet requirements of AAMA 101 for Architectural Class Windows (AW).
b. Design Features: Windows shall have thermal break design, pressure equalization design and
rain screen principle.
c. Air Infiltration: Leakage of air at rate of 0.10 maximum cfm per linear foot of sash crack, when
subjected to uniform static air pressure difference of 20 percent of design pressure, but not less
than 6.24 psf, when evaluated meeting requirements of ASTM E283.
d. Water Resistance: No water leakage shall occur when subjected to uniform static air pressure
difference of 20 percent of design pressure, but not less than 8.00 psf, when evaluated meeting
requirements of ASTM E331.
e. Insulating Values: Work shall have insulating values at 15 mph wind velocity, 5 year aged value
for insulation, when evaluated meeting requirements of AAMA 1503. Data derived from
calculations, theoretical assumptions and test results of different size or arrangement of units is
not acceptable.
1) Metal Framing: Fixed areas with U -value of 0.55 Btu -h4 -F maximum.
2) Glass Panels: Meet requirements of Section 08800 -Glazing, for respective glass unit.
f. Condensation Control: Design, fabricate and install windows to prevent condensation on indoor
face with building heating and ventilating system in normal operation. See outdoor and indoor
environmental criteria in Section 01415 - Performance Requirements. Architect will furnish
specific heating and ventilating data as may be requested by Contractor. Condensation is
defined as visible water, ice or frost on any area of any module of window, or accumulation of
uncontrolled condensation flowing from window at any location.
g. Condensation Resistance: Areas of windows and associated closed and locked sashes and
ventilators of work shall have a condensation resistance factor (CRF) of 60 minimum when
AESI27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -4
18JAN08
® •
tested for thermal performance meeting requirements of AAMA 1503. Except for size, proposed
units shall contain same weep holes, hardware and operating characteristics as windows tested
for structural performance, air infiltration and water resistance compliance. Data derived from
calculations, theoretical assumptions, and test results of different size and arrangement of
systems are not acceptable.
h. Thermal Break Criteria: Assume thermal breaks to have no ability to transfer stress for
composite action of members. Also assume elements joined by thermal break to act separately.
Provide backup connection which will hold frame together in event of breakdown or failure of
thermal break material.
1) Provide units with an integral, concealed, low conductance, thermal barrier located between
exterior materials and members exposed on interior, in a manner that eliminates direct
metal -to -metal contact.
2) Provide thermal break construction that has been in use 3 years minimum, has been tested
to demonstrate resistance of thermal conductance and condensation, and has been tested
to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.
i. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide glazed windows rated for not less than 40 STC when
tested for on -site sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined byASTM E
413.
1) The above STC criterion applies to all Townhome residential windows on the North facade
only.
2) For the Townhome residential windows on the North facade, use Fulton Windows 1250
Series Acoustic Sliding Windows or equal as approved by the Architect.
n
j. Thermal Transmittance: Window units shall have U -value maximum of 0.65 Btu - h -ft Fat 15
mph exterior wind velocity when evaluated meeting requirements of AAMA 1503.
k. Forced -Entry Resistance: Window units shall meet requirements of ASTM F588 for
Performance Level 10.
I. Limit Device: Device shall limit opening of window unit to no more than 4 inch sphere.
m. Rotary Operator Test: Test meeting requirements of ASTM E405, Method A, for following:
Operating moment 120 pound force- inches for 500 cycles and closing torque 60 pound force -
inches for 500; operating moment 120 pound force - inches for 7,500 cycles and closing torque
60 pound force - inches for 7,500. The 7,500 cycle test shall follow 500 cycle test.
15. Windows - Indoor Work:
a. General: Windows shall be of construction detail to meet requirements of AAMA 101 for
Architectural Class Windows (AW), but are not required to meet non - structural performance
requirements of outdoor windows.
D. Tolerances: Completed work shall be within following tolerances:
1. Location Variation: Deviation from theoretical or designed position in horizontal or vertical plane,
including deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle, shall not exceed 1/8 inch in any 12 foot
run in any direction or shall not exceed 1/4 inch total at any location.
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
18JAN08
08520 -5
2. Alignment: Deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle shall not exceed 1/8 inch in any12
feet of actual length of any member or 1/4 inch in any total run in any line, whichever is less.
3. Plane Alignment Offsets: Limit offsets from true alignment between consecutive or adjoining
members placed end -to -end or edge -to -edge in same plane as follows:
a. Maximum offset of 1/32 inch for required flush alignments, including any alignment to be 1/4 inch
or less out -of -flush and any separation by a reveal or protrusion in plane of 2 inches or less.
b. Maximum offset of 1/16 inch for required out -of -flush alignments, including any alignment to be
more than 1/4 inch out -of -flush and any separation by a reveal or protrusion in plane of more
than 2 inches.
4. Glass Framing Offset: Maximum offset between glass framing members at corners of glazing
channel shall not exceed 1/32 inch.
5. Metal Flatness: Flat metal sheet and panels shall have exterior surfaces of such flatness thatwhen
measured the maximum slope of surface at any point, measured from the nominal plane of surface,
shall not exceed 1.25 percent.
6. Appearance Variation: Variations in appearance of finishes shall not be noticeable from 10' -0" by
Architect under lighting conditions at place of installation.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Responsibility: Work shall be performed by a single manufacturer or installer having undivided
responsibility for providing complete work and for performance, quality and appearance of work.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: One of acceptable manufacturers specified in Part 2 of this Section.
C. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer, or installer acceptable to manufacturer and specialized in
performing work of this Section, with 5 years minimum documented experience in design, engineering,
detailing, fabrication, installation and maintenance of extent, type and quality required for work. Upon
request, provide proof of qualifications.
D. Engineer of Contractor Qualifications: Professional engineer of Contractor licensed to practice as a
structural engineer in jurisdiction where the work is located and experienced in providing structural
engineering services that have resulted in successful installation and performance of work similar in
extent, design and products to that required for the work.
E. Compliance Certificates: Compliance certificates of products may be submitted in lieu of testing, when
acceptable to Architect. Compliance certificates shall be certified by product manufacturer.
F. Quality Control:
1. Compatibility and Adhesion Tests -Sealants: Meet requirements of Section 07920 -Joint Sealants.
2. Finish: Independent Quality Control Service employed by Owner will select random samples from
production run of finished components for evaluation.
G. Pre - Installation Meeting: Conduct a pre - installation meeting at project site prior to starting work and
delivery of products to review conditions associated with performing work. Meeting shall include review
of construction conditions, substrate conditions, environmental requirements, ambient conditions and
coordination required for installation of work. Meeting participants shall include Architect, representative
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -6
18JAN08
e •
of manufacturer, installer of work and installers of related work. Record discussions of meeting, and
agreements and disagreements reached, and furnish a copy of record to each participant.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. General: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and installation
instructions of manufacturer for each material, component and finish required. Include published
data, certified conformance report or certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating
that each material, component and finish meets requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Cleaning Agents: Submit written verification that recommended cleaning agents for cleaning work
are compatible with materials, components and finishes, and adjacent building materials and
finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of work, including associated
components. Shop drawings shall be prepared by manufacturer. Shop drawings prepared by installer
are not acceptable. Organize shop drawings into one coordinated submittal indicating proper relation to
adjacent work. Identify each component of work using same identification reference indicated on
Drawings. Include plans and elevations at 1/4 inch scale, typical unit elevations at 3/4 inch scale and
detail sections at full scale. Indicate requirements and details for following and other pertinent data not
included in submitted product data:
1. Layout arrangement, dimensions and details of entire work, including associated components.
Indicate arrangement and, where necessary, details of adjacent construction relative to work,
correctly detailed and dimensioned.
2. Show anchorages, framing components, joints, movement provisions, glazing details, hardware and
i other components.
3. Profiles, sections and dimensions of each material and component, and type, size and location of
reinforcement.
4. Specifications for materials.
5. Reactions imparted by work to supporting structure, reactions locations and proposed connection
details for coordination with supporting structure.
6. Location and details of anchorage devices and inserts, including devices and inserts to be
embedded in or attached to supporting structure. Show types, sizes, location, shimming and
adjacent materials. Furnish templates if required for accurate placement.
7. Typical and special details of performance, assembly, installation and anchorage. Include following:
a. Joinery details and techniques, including joint system types, horizontal and vertical a )pansion
and contraction provisions with locations and sizes, weldments, fasteners and sealants. Identify
type and location of shop and field applied sealants.
b. Internal water drainage system including weeps.
c. Operable windows and associated components, including provisions for hardware and hardware
mounting locations.
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -7
18JAN08
d. Glazing systems, including position and clearances of glass edges relative to framing rabbets.
8. Certification: Shop drawings shall be certified and sealed by engineer of Contractor who performed
design work, stating work meets most stringent requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Samples:
1. Metal: Submit sets of samples of each required type and color of finish on 12 inch long sections of
extrusions and 12 inch square sheets of same metal alloy to be used forwork. Where normal color,
sheen and texture variations are to be anticipated, include 3 or more units in each sample to show
extreme range of such variations. Samples will be reviewed only for visual characteristics.
2. Other Materials: Submit samples of other materials and components exposed to view in the
completed work. Samples will be reviewed only for visual characteristics.
3. Window Sample: Provide a full scale operating window sample with dimensions between elements
reduced to eliminate bulk. Submit shop drawings of sample for review prior to submittal of sample.
Accepted sample shall serve as quality standard for work. Deliver accepted sample to project site,
and protect and maintain until final acceptance of work.
4. Verification: Right is reserved for Architect to require samples of typical fabricated sections to show
design, fabrication and workmanship before fabrication of work proceeds. Samples will be onlyfor
information.
5. Others: Right is reserved to require additional samples to show fabrication, techniques,
workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. Samples will be only for information.
D. Structural Calculations:
1. General: Submit structural calculations for work required to meet performance criteria indicated by
Contract Documents, prepared in accordance with good and prudent structural engineering theory
and current design practice and in accordance with appropriate design standards. Submittals will be
only for information.
2. Analysis: Calculations shall include analysis for required loads on supporting structure, including
performance criteria specified in Paragraph - Performance Requirements, of this Section, and
resultant reactions at each connection point to supporting structure. Show section property
computations for framing members. Existing test reports, data from other projects, or untried or
unproven theories will not be acceptable.
3. Certification: Calculations shall be certified and sealed by engineer of Contractor who performed
design work, stating work meets most stringent requirements of Contract Documents.
E. Test Reports: Submit test reports from a recognized independent testing laboratory certifying
performance of work. Each report shall be certified by party conducting or supervising test. Submit
report for following:
1. Uniform load structural performance.
2. Window component structural performance.
3. Uniform load deflection.
4. Air infiltration rate.
AES127210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -8
18JAN08
•
5. Water resistance.
6. Thermal transmittance.
7. Condensation resistance.
8. Forced entry resistance.
9. Rotary operator test.
•
10. On-site STC rating test (Townhome North fagade residential windows only).
F. Performance Certification: Submit performance certification prepared, certified and sealed by engineer
of Contractor who performed design work. Certification shall specifically indicate work meets most
stringent requirements of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities
bearing on performance of the Work.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. General: Meet instructions and recommendations of manufacturers for handling, storing and protecting
products.
B. Handling: Only manufacturer or installer shall unload and distribute products to respective areas for
installation.
C. Storage: Store materials and components in a manner which will prevent damage or contamination,
distortion, breakage and structural weakening.
D. Built -In Items: Coordinate and deliver components to be built -in supporting construction. Provide final
i
reviewed shop drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for installation of built -in components.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection: Protect installed work from damage and deterioration meeting requirements and
recommendations of product manufacturers, other than effects of normal weathering until final
acceptance.
B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of work with requirements of supporting structure, including
framing and connections to supporting structure for support and anchorage of work.
"'i Z1001
A. Data: Provide maintenance data for work and appurtenances. Include instructions for operation and
maintenance, including cleaning and repair of finishes, and product data of manufacturer for each
material and component. Also include recommended cleaning agents.
B. Demonstrations: Demonstrate proper cleaning methods to designated personnel of Owner during final
cleaning.
A. General: Warranty work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except warranty shall include
additional requirements specified in this Article.
B. Coverage:
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -9
18JAN08
E3 O
General: Defective materials and workmanship include, but are not limited to, abnormal
deterioration, aging and weathering of the work; air infiltration and water leakage exceeding
specified limits; excessive deflections and failure of components resulting from exposure to
pressures, loads, and forces up to specified limits; failure of operating parts to function normally;
deterioration and defacement of finishes in excess of normal weathering and aging, and exceeding
specified limits; breakage and deterioration of glass units, and failure of work to meet performance
criteria indicated by Contract Documents.
2. Extent: Warranty shall not include normal wear of weatherstripping, damage caused by vandalism
and conditions exceeding performance criteria. However, warranty shall include failures and defects
for which causes cannot be determined.
3. Corrections: Warranty shall include corrections of work found to be defective or not meeting
requirements of Contract Documents. Included shall be:
a. Removal, replacement and correction of damages resulting from such defects or non-
conformance with Contract Documents, and of other materials and work to extent required to
repair or replace work, exclusive of repairs required as a result of improper maintenance or
operation, or of normal wear.
b. Removal and replacement of other materials and work covering defective work, to extent
required to repair or replace defective work.
c. Corrective work shall be performed by original installer.
4. Repair Period: If product or work defect or failure should occur within warranty time period, installer
shall repair such defect or failure within a 24 hour period after being informed by Owner. If at end of
this time, installer is unable to begin repairs, Owner will have option of taking any action necessary
to make repairs, and installer shall reimburse Owner, in full, for any expenses incurred in performing
repairs. Any such action shall not be a breach of warranty provisions.
5. Limitations: Include speck statements of any limitations, required maintenance and similar
conditions of warranty.
C. Costs: Warranty shall be without cost limitations and at no expense to Owner.
D. Signatures: Warranty shall be signed by Contractor, installer and manufacturer.
E. Time Period: Extend warranty time period as follows:
1. General: 5 years, except as otherwise specified.
2. PVDF Finish: 20 years for coil application and 10 years for spray application.
3. Other Components: Component work specified in other Specification Sections shall have a warranty
time period as specified in respective section, except when a greater time period is required by this
Section.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -10
18JAN08
A
•
A. Kawneer Company, Inc.
B. Modu -Line Windows, Inc.
C. TRACO Architectural Systems, Inc.
D. Wausau Metals Corporation.
E. Winstrom Manufacturing Corporation.
F. Fulton Windows.
G. Manufacturer of storefront or curtain wall as applicable.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum:
0
1. General: Meet requirements of AA - Aluminum Standards and Data and specified material
requirements, except for more stringent requirements where required to assure properfunction and
performance of aluminum windows and components. Aluminum alloys and tempers shall be as
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for product type, performance, and application
and control of required finish, but not less than 22,000 psi ultimate strength.
2. Extrusions: ASTM B221, prime billet.
3. Plate and Sheet: ASTM 8209.
4. Bars, Rods, and Wires: ASTM 8211.
A
B. Threaded Fasteners:
1. General: Bolts, nuts, screws and washers shall be of types and dimensions required for application,
performance and durability, and shall not cause electrolytic corrosion. Provide lock washer or other
like positive locking devices at bolted connections.
2. Concealed: Threaded fasteners concealed in the completed work shall be corrosion resistant and
compatible with contact materials.
3. Exposed: Threaded fasteners exposed in the completed work shall be of same material as fastened
components, otherwise of non - magnetic stainless steel. Provide countersunk, oval head screws with
Phillips drive slot. Finish heads to match finish of fastened components.
4. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, reinforce
the interior with aluminum or non - magnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide
standard non - corrosive, pressed -in splined grommet nuts.
C. Welding Electrodes: Meet requirements of parent metal manufacturers and AWS D1.2, as applicable.
Type electrode and metal filler alloy shall meet instructions and recommendations of manufacturers of
metals to be welded and shall be as required for strength, compatibility and finish in fabricated work.
D. Insulation: Mineral fiber insulation formed into batts, blankets or semi -rigid board with or without vapor
barrier, as required for application and performance of windows. Insulation shall meet requirements of
Section 07210 - Building Insulation. When required, vapor barrier shall be aluminum foil type laminated
to one face.
E. Concealed Flashing: Dead -soft stainless steel, 0.018 inch minimum thickness, or extruded aluminum,
0.026 inch minimum thickness, of an alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibilitywith other
components.
to AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
18JAN08
08520 -11
C) O
F. Sealant:
General: Sealant required for use as an adhesive or joint seal in fabrication or installation of an
assembly or component part of work, except for glazing and sealing joints between windows and
adjacent construction, shall be a non -acid neutral cure silicone sealant meeting requirements of
ASTM C920, Class A (non -sag). Specific type and performance of sealant for each application,
considering intended function, joinery, movement and substrates shall be as recommended by
sealant manufacturer. In addition to requirements of this Section, meet applicable requirements of
Section 07920 - Joint Sealants.
2. Glazing: Sealants for glazing shall be as specified in Paragraph - Glass and Glazing, of this
Section.
3. Adjacent Construction Joint: Sealant for sealing joints between work and adjacent construction
shall be a sealant meeting requirements of Section 07920 - Joint Sealants.
G. Compression Weatherstripping: Replaceable stripping of either molded neoprene gaskets meeting
requirements of ASTM D2000, Designation 26415 to 313620, or molded PVC gaskets meeting
requirements of ASTM D2287.
H. Sliding Weatherstripping:
1. Replaceable stripping of polypropylene or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric and aluminum strip
backing, meeting requirements of AAMA 701.2. Sliding weatherstripping includes stripping at jamb
rails, head rails and meeting rails, wherever there is no stop or lap to receive compression
weatherstripping (wiping action as well as sliding action).
2. Provide stripping with integral centerline barrier fin of semi -rigid plastic sheet of polypropylene.
I. Finish Coating Materials: As specified in Article - Finishes, of this Section.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Framing System:
General: Provide aluminum framing systems of types required for glazing or installing panels and to
accommodate associated components.
2. Material: Framing system members and components shall be of extruded aluminum with minimum
wall thickness as follows:
a. Frame and Sash: 0.125 inch.
b. Secondary Components: 0.062 inch.
c. Snap -On Covers: 0.050 inch.
3. Plastic Components: No plastic, polymer resin or like material or component shall be used in
framing system as only means of retaining, securing, anchoring and connecting glazing stops and
panels to framing members, metal components and like conditions.
4. Reinforcement: Reinforce framing members for structural adequacy and support of appurtenances
as required.
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -12
18JAN08
• 0
5. Clearances: Provisions shall be made in framing for minimum edge clearances, bite (edge cover)
and width of glazing rabbet for type and thickness of glass or panel unit to be installed, meeting
instructions of respective manufacturer and applicable requirements of Section 08800 - Glazing.
6. Water Drainage: Provisions shall be made in outdoor framing to ensure water drainage pattern to
outdoors without internal water accumulation and contact with perimeter of glass or panel units.
7. Calking Slot: Provide frames with perimeter calking slots, to provide recessed sealant bead with
sealant surface flush with face of frame, eliminating fillet type sealant beads.
8. Associated Components: Closures, covers and trim associated with framing shall be of aluminum
sheet or plate of 0.125 inch minimum thickness depending on size of components.
B. Flashing:
1. General: Provide flashing external and internal to window work.
2. Standard: Meet requirements of Section 07620 - Flashing and Trim and meet applicable
requirements of SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and SMACNA - Architectural Sheet
Metal Specifications.
3. Material: Flashing shall be of same metal and finish as adjacent window system component, except
as otherwise required. Units of flashing shall be uniform and free of oil canning, undulations, and
other undesirable visual effects as required to meet flatness performance criteria of this Section.
Provide stiffeners welded or bonded to concealed surfaces of flashing as required to assure
optimum flatness of final flashing units.
4. Internal Flashing: Aluminum sheet of 0.020 inch minimum thickness or dead soft stainless steel
sheet of 0.018 inch minimum thickness.
3
5. External Flashing: Meet requirements of Section 07620 - Flashing and Trim.
6. Joints: Joints in flashing shall occur at 10 foot maximum centers uniformly spaced in each
application run of flashing. Also, locate joints 2 feet from each side of intersections. Provide for
expansion and contraction movement. Joints shall be weathertight. Exterior surfaces of adjacent
flashing units shall be aligned flush with no accentuation of joints. Typical joint detail shall be butt
seamed with back -up plate, tongue and groove or other similar detail acceptable to the Architect.
Joint detail at corners and like transitions shall be corner units of one or two piece construction with
joints continuously welded and finished to match and blend with parent metal.
7. Details:
a. Hems: Fold back the sheet metal to form a hem on the concealed side of exposed edges.
b. Drips: Turn out bottom edges of exposed vertical flashing 30 degrees to form a 1/2 inch wide
drip.
c. Fasteners: Insofar as possible, provide flashing with concealed installation fastening system.
C. Glass and Glazing:
1. General: In addition to requirements of this Section, glass and glazing materials and glazing
systems shall be meet requirements of Section 08800 - Glazing.
10 AES127210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -13
18JAN08
AWN
2. Glazing Gaskets: For glazing factory installed glass and panels, and for gaskets which are factory
installed in a captive assembly of glazing stops, provide stripping of molded neoprene meeting
requirements of ASTM D2000, Designation 2BC415 to 36620, or molded PVC meeting
requirements of ASTM D2287, or molded closed cell neoprene meeting requirements of ASTM
C509, Grade 4.
3. Accessories: As recommended in GANA - Glazing Manual.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide standard accessories of manufacturers that meet with requirements of standards
specified in this Section.
B. Anchors, Clip and Window Accessories: Depending on strength and corrosion inhibiting requirements,
fabricate anchors, clips and window accessories of aluminum or non - magnetic stainless steel.
C. Slip Pads: Provide high impact resistant plastic isolators, spacers or bearing pads to assure free
movement between moving components at thermal movement connections and other like joints. Slip
pads shall be of types, configurations and dimensions required for each application, performance and
durability.
D. Wire Fabric Insect Screen and Frame:
1. Screen: 18 by 18 mesh of 0.013 inch diameter coated aluminum wire, meeting requirements of
ANSVIWS 089.
2. Screen Frames:
a. Fabricate frames of tubular shaped extruded or formed aluminum members of 0.040 inch
minimum wall thickness, with mitered or coped joints and concealed mechanical fasteners.
Finish frames to match window units.
b. Provide removable PVC spline anchor concealing edge of screen frame.
3. Wickets: Provide sliding wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and durability during handling.
E. Weep Hole Filters: Protect weep holes from intrusion of foreign material with 45 pour/inch open cell,
fully reticulated foam, compressed to 50 to 60 percent.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate work to profiles and dimensions indicated by Contract Documents from materials of
types, thickness and finishes required. Achieve required performance criteria and coordinate with other
work. Meet instructions and recommendations of respective material manufacturers. Provide
appurtenances required for complete work.
B. Coordination:
1. General: Coordinate fabrication with related construction. Complete fabrication with related
construction. Correct any errors, omissions and inconsistencies before proceeding.
2. Related Components: Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metalwork prior to
cleaning, finishing, treatment and application of coatings, except as otherwise customary to work
process.
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -14
18JAN08
• •
C. Materials:
1. Type: Materials incorporated in work shall be corrosion resistant, non - staining, non - bleeding and
compatible with adjoining materials.
2. Size and Thickness: Use materials of size and thickness required by Contract Documents as
minimum requirements. Select size and thickness to provide necessary strength and durability in
finished work for intended application.
D. Metal Surfaces:
1. For metal items which will be exposed to view in completed work, use only materials which are
smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, die marks, rolled
trade names and roughness.
2. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit variations in flatness exceeding those
permitted by reference standards.
E. Reinforcement: Reinforce work as required to meet performance criteria, for anchoring work to
supporting structure and for reinforcement of hardware and operating mechanism. Reinforcement shall
be concealed in completed work.
F. Exposed Work:
1. General: Exposed work shall be carefully matched to provide continuity of line and design, and
accurate relation of planes and angles.
2. Surfaces: Select materials for flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes, including
i pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration, and other like conditions. Imperfections are
not acceptable.
3. Sizes: Materials shall be one piece units as applicable for application of required profiles and
dimensions.
G. Joinery:
1. Joints in work shall be accurately fitted, square and in alignment, rigidly secured with hairline
contacts and sealed weathertight. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude penetration or infiltration of water.
2. Form sections to provide flush meeting edges without laps at joints and exposed edges.
3. Fit components to be free of vibration and rattle.
4. Cope or miter comers and other intersections as applicable.
5. Joinery methods shall not effect finish or be unsightly.
6. Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
7. Weld by methods recommended by manufacturer of parent metal and AWS to avoid discoloration
at welds. Grind exposed welds smooth and restore finish.
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -15
18JAN08
8. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Provide secure attachment
and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of contacting members.
H. Bent Corners: Form bent comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation,
discoloration and otherwise impairing work.
I. Edges: Remove arrises from cut edges, and ease edges and comers to a radius of approximately 1/64
inch.
J. Flatness and Rigidity: Surfaces shall be uniform and free of oil canning, undulations, and other
undesirable visual effects as required to meet flatness performance criteria of this Section. Provide
stiffeners welded or bonded to concealed surfaces or laminated backing as required to assure optimum
flatness and rigidity.
K. Assembly:
1. General: Fabricate components into complete units true to line with accurate angles and straight
edges. Methods of assembly and joining shall be proven methods optional with manufacturer.
Workmanship and finished items shall be acceptable to Architect.
2. Clearances: Fabricate work allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing of components
within limits of performance criteria, yet enabling assembly and installation.
3. Fasteners:
a. General: Do not use exposed fasteners, except where unavoidable for assembly of units and
unavoidable for application. When required, exposed fasteners shall be equally spaced,
countersunk and finished to match fastened components. No fastener shall impair independent
movement of components.
b. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick,
reinforce interior with aluminum or non - magnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or
provide standard non - corrosive pressed -in splined grommet nuts.
4. Welding:
a. General: Perform welding with electrodes and by methods recommended by parent metal
manufacturer and AWS standards. Soldering and brazing are not acceptable. Avoid distortion
and discoloration of parent metal and filler metal at welds, and ensure uniformity of finish color.
b. Methods: Welds behind finished surface shall be performed so as to minimize distortion and
discoloration on finished side. Weld spatter and welding oxides on finished surfaces shall be
removed.
c. Finishing: Weld beads on exposed surfaces shall be ground and finished to match and blend
with finish of adjacent parent metal. Grinding and polishing of non - ferrous metal shall be
performed only with clean devices and compounds free from iron, iron compounds and other
substances which would result in stain or discoloration of surfaces.
5. Distortion and Overstress: Fabricate and fasten work so work will not be distorted nor fasteners
overstressed from expansion, contraction, and other movements of work.
L. Separations:
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -16
18JAN08
0 0
1. Moving Joints: Separate surfaces at moving joints with slip pads to permanently prevent freeze -up
of joints.
2. Dissimilar Materials: Separate dissimilar materials and other sources of corrosion, including
electrolytic corrosion, by providing separators or 3 mil minimum dry film thickness application of zinc
chromate metal primer paint meeting requirements ofASTM D478 on concealed contact surfaces.
Do not extend materials onto surfaces exposed in completed work.
M. Drainage System: Fabricate to ensure water drainage pattern to outdoors; internal water accumulation
is not acceptable.
N. Hardware Preparation:
1. General: Prepare window units to receive hardware. Template to greatest extent possible.
2. Procedures: Comply with hardware templates and other essential information required to ensure
proper fit and operation of windows and hardware. Work with accurate templates of hardware
mortises to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory.
3. Work: Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap work as required to receive hardware. Meet instructions,
recommendations and template requirements of hardware manufacturer. Use concealed fasteners
wherever possible. Install hardware at place of window unit fabrication. Remove hardware only as
required for final finishing operations, and for delivery and installation of work at project site.
O. Weatherstripping: Provide weatherstripping in stiles and rails, as applicable, to be adjustable and
replaceable without dismantling windows.
P. Completed Fabrications: Completely fabricate components, including cutting, fitting and like functions,
before cleaning, finishing, and applying coatings.
2.06 FINISHES
A. General:
1. Finish: Meet requirements and recommendations of NAAMM - Metal Finishes Manual relative to
finishes required. Factory finish metal components providing required type finish. Finish surfaces
exposed in the completed work shall match final reviewed samples. Coordinate finishes of
components to assure uniform quality and finish, including color, textures and sheen.
2. System Qualifications: Application of each finish system shall be qualified by finish manufacturer.
Provide certification that applicator is acceptable to finish manufacturer and that process, including
surface preparation and pretreatment, and coating applications and curing, is in accordance with
specifications of finish manufacturer.
3. Repair: Repair or touch -up of finished surfaces shall be as specified in Article - Adjusting and
Cleaning, of this Section.
B. Required Finishes: Provide components with respective type finish as follows and meeting
requirements for type finish as specified in this Article:
1. Exposed Aluminum - PVDF finish, solid color to match existing Condominium Tower North Window
system; Kynar painted bronze finish, color number K70634.
C. PVDF Finish: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) finish shall be high performance, heavy duty, resin finish
AES127210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -17
18JAN08
system. Finish coats shall contain 70 percent minimum by weight of PVDF resin, Arkema Inc., Kynar
500, or Solvay Solexis, Inc., Hylar 5000.
1. Performance: Finish system shall meet requirements of AAMA 2605.2, and for 20 years minimum
period service life shall not chalk more than ASTM D4214, Method A, Number 8 Rating, not change
color more than 5 A E Hunter units when evaluated meeting requirements of ASTM D2244, and not
check, craze or peel. In addition, finish system shall meet performance criteria and data indicated in
current system specifications of specified finish manufacturer.
2. Applications:
a. Coil: Use coil application finish system for sheet metal substrates.
b. Spray: Use spray application finish system for extruded substrates.
3. Colors: Conventional solid color, except bright and metallic colors, of finish manufacturer as
selected by Architect.
4. Texture: Smooth finish.
D. Anodic Finishes:
1. Clear: AA- M10C22A41, unspecified mill finish, medium matte, clear (natural) aluminum color,
Architectural Class 1 (0.7 mils) meeting requirements of AAMA 611.
2. Testing: Quality Assurance Service will test for meeting requirements of ISO 3210.
2.07 WINDOWS - GENERAL
A. General: Provide aluminum framed windows and associated appurtenances meeting requirements of
ANSVAAMA 101 for type configuration and performance class as required by Contract Documents.
B. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal drainage passages to conduct infiltrating water to
outdoors.
C. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units of required profile and dimensions, but
not less than 0.094 inch minimum thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners and weld and dress
smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units.
D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors forsupport
to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of
window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated.
E. Sidelights and Transoms: Aluminum framed, fixed glazed units in profiles with properties matching
adjacent operating units. Match profiles shown on drawings.
F. Hardware:
1. General:
a. Provide manufacturer standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel or other
corrosion resistant material compatible with aluminum and of strength to perform function for
which hardware is intended.
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -18 r
18JAN08
E
�J
b. Provide hardware with low conductivity or non - metallic material for hardware bridging thermal
breaks at frame or vent sash.
6 1 G. Glazing System:
1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
2. Size and details of glazing rabbets and glazing materials shall provide for movement requirements
specified and shall remain elastic, non - shrinking and non - migrating for life of installation.
3. Glazing shall be performed at factory or at project site.
H. Accessories: Provide insect screens with frames and framed wickets required for access to operators.
2.08 DOUBLE HUNG WINDOWS
A. Definition: Double hung windows are vertically operating windows in which the sash weight is offset by a
counterbalancing mechanism mounted in window.
B. Cleaning Feature: Provide window units that have tilt -in feature permitting both sides of sash to be
cleaned from interior.
C. Hardware: Provide following hardware as applicable:
1. Lock: Cam action sweep lock and keeper on meeting rail.
2. Lock: Pole- operated cam action locking device on meeting rail of windows with meeting rail more
than 6 feet above the floor.
3. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Concealed block and tackle type of size and capacity to hold sash
stationary at any open position. Balance arms with adjustable, nonabrasive friction pivots.
4. Lift and Pull -Down Handles: Continuous extruded aluminum pull handle integral sash lift bar on
bottom rail, extending full width of lower sash. Finish to match window unit.
5. Pole Socket: Provide a pole socket or groove on inside face of top rail of upper sash on window
units with meeting rails more than 6 feet above floor. Provide one pole and one pole hanger for
each room.
2.09 PROJECTED OUT WINDOWS
A. Definition: Projected windows hinged at top of frame, sash outswinging from bottom.
B. Hardware:
1. Operator: Project out geared dual arm action rotary operator, exposed crank and housing,
concealed track and cast white bronze in brushed or bronze oxidized finish, meeting requirements
of ASTM E405, Method A, when subjected to operating moments and closing torques indicated in
AAMA 101.
2. Friction Hinge: 4 -bar concealed, Series 300 stainless steel, slide track, nylon friction block encased
in sliding brass shoe with limit stop to prevent a 4 inch sphere from passing through sash opening.
Provide 2 hinges minimum for each window unit. Meet requirements of AAMA 904.1.
10 AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -19
18JAN08
V
3. Lock: Cam action sweep lock handle with surface mounted strike.
4. Keepers: Single point keepers, exposed handles and housing, concealed strike, cast white bronze
in brushed or bronze obdized finish. Provide 2 keepers on each unit over 42 inches wide.
5. Limit Device: Friction adjustor with stud on track to be non - releasable. Can have option of a
custodial key release for further opening.
2.10 PROJECTED IN WINDOWS
A. Definition: Projected windows hinged at bottom of frame, sash inswinging from top.
B. Hardware:
1. Friction Hinge: 4 -bar concealed, Series 300 stainless steel, slide track, nylon friction block encased
in sliding brass shoe with limit stop to prevent a 4 inch sphere from passing through sash opening.
Provide 2 hinges minimum for each window unit. Meet requirements of AAMA 904.1.
2. Operator /Lock: Cam action sweep lock handle with surface mounted strike.
3. Keepers: Single point keepers, exposed handles and housing, concealed strike, cast white bronze in
brushed or bronze oxidized finish. Provide 2 keepers on each unit over 42 inches wide.
4. Limit Device: Friction adjustor with stud on track to be non - releasable. Can have option of a
custodial key release for further opening.
2.11 CASEMENT WINDOWS
A. Definition: Casement windows hinged at the sides of jambs, sash outswinging away from plane of the
frame.
B. Hardware:
1. Operator: Outswing geared single arm action rotary operator, exposed crank and housing,
concealed track, cast white bronze in brushed or bronze ox6dized finish, meeting requirements of
ASTM E405, Method A, when subjected to operating moments and closing torques indicated in
AAMA 101.
2. Friction Hinge: Butt, stainless steel, concealed 4 -bar hinges with adjustable slide shoe, to prevent a
4 inch sphere from passing through sash opening. Provide 2 hinges for each window unit.
3. Lock: Lift -type cam action lock.
4. Keepers: Single or multi -point exposed handles and housing, concealed strike, castwhite bronze in
brushed or bronze oxddized finish.
5. Limit Device: Friction adjustor with stud on track to be non - releasable. Can have option of a
custodial key release for further opening.
2.12 SLIDING WINDOWS
A. Definition: Horizontal sliding windows running in parallel shared tracks.
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -20
18JAN08
• i
B. Hardware:
1. Sash Rollers: Stainless- steel, lubricated ball- bearing rollers with nylon tires.
2. Sash Lock: Cam - action sweep sash lock and keeper at meeting rails.
3. Retain subparagraph below if limit devices are required for safety or wind -load concerns.
4. Limit Device: Sash stop limit device; mounted in bottom of pull stile.
5. Removable Lift -Out Sash: Design windows and provide with tamperproof hardware to permit
removal of sash from inside for cleaning.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Meet requirements of Contract Documents, including requirements specified in applicable
reference specification sections and in Part 2 of this Section, as indicated by final reviewed submittals
for work, and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers, exceptwhere more
stringent requirements are indicated by Contract Documents. Consult with manufacturers for conditions
not covered by printed instructions.
B. Defective Components: Do not install components which are observed to be defective, including
warped, bowed, dented, abraded, and broken members, and glass with edge damage. Remove such
components and replace with new components as applicable before time of acceptance.
i
C. Cutting: Do not cut, trim, and joint components during installation, in manner which would damage
finish, decrease strength, and result in visual imperfection and failure in performance of work.
D. Trueness: Install components level, plumb, square, true to line, free of warp and twist, correctlyaligned,
and with uniform joints and reveals. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacentwork.
E. Anchorage:
1. Anchor components securely in place by permanent mechanical attachment system, which meets
performance criteria and permit movements which are intended and necessary.
2. Secure to supporting structure using methods of attachment permitting sufficient adjustment to
accommodate construction tolerances and irregularities. Use non - staining and non - corrosive shims,
anchors, fasteners, spacers and fillers.
F. Joints: Seal joints within work and between work and adjacent construction where installation of work
creates final joints to provide weathertight construction.
G. Water Drainage: Maintain integrity of internal water drainage system.
H. Welding: Welding of aluminum is not permitted.
I. Separations: Install separators as applicable on concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials,
before assembly and installation, wherever there is possibility of corrosion, including electrolytic
corrosion.
it AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -21
18JAN08
0
J. Insulation: Meet requirements of Section 07210 - Building Insulation.
1. Set insulation units with vapor barrier to inside of construction. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor
barrier, using adhesive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturer, and seal each
continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction so as to ensure vapor tight installation of
units.
2. Provide insulation packed in interior spaces of framing and shim spaces, applied over cover
assemblies and non - vision areas, and at other like locations, completely filling void spaces or
covering area to maintain continuity of framing system, thermal resistance and to prevent air drafts
in or through framing system.
K. Sill Members: Set sill members and other like items in abed of sealant or joint filler to provide tight and
weathertight construction. Meet requirements of Section 07920 - Joint Sealants.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Operable Components: Adjust and lubricate operable components of work to function properly, without
binding, and to provide proper fit at interface areas within required tolerances.
B. Protective Covering: Remove any temporary protective covering provided by manufacturer at time of
Substantial Completion, except as otherwise instructed by manufacturer.
C. Restoration:
1. General: Restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. If results of restoration
are not acceptable to Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
2. Coatings: Clean and touch -up minor abrasions in finish coatings with air dried coating that is
compatible with and matches type, color and sheen of factory applied coating and blends with initial
surface.
D. Cleaning:
1. Clean work surfaces after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to finish surfaces. Remove
protective material from prefinished surfaces, labels, excess sealant and glazing materials, dirt and
other substances. Remove dirt from corners.
2. Cleaning materials and methods shall meet instructions and recommendations of manufacturer and
shall not be detrimental to materials and shall promote achievement of uniform appearance.
3. Maintain work in a clean condition throughout construction period, so work will be without damage or
deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. Immediately before final
completion, thoroughly clean inside and outside surfaces.
END OF SECTION
AESI 27210 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -22 v
18JAN08
i •
11
v
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL, INC. SECTION 08710
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Description: Door hardware is indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary and
incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
B. Included: Door hardware includes, but is not limited to, following:
1. Door hardware items known commercially as builders hardware which are required for swing,
sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and non - matching hardware specified in
same section as door and door frame.
2. Lock cylinders for all lock sets in the Work, including lock sets for special doors, keyed switches and
like items requiring cylinders.
3. Keying system.
4. Templates.
5. Electronic access control systems.
6. Thresholds, and stripping and seals.
7. Door operators.
8. Hardware schedule.
9. Furnishing door hardware for doors to be provided as part of single responsibility work.
C. Schedule: Door hardware sets are indicated in Article - Hardware Set Schedule, at end of this Section.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessibility and Useable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ANSVBHMA 156 Series - Builders Hardware.
3. DHI - Applicable standards.
4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, for electrical components.
5. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, for fire rated door assemblies.
6. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code (Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures), forfire
rated door assemblies.
1 0 AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE
18JAN08
08710 -1
AWN
7. UL 10C -Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
8. USDOJ -Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
9. Handicapped people accessibility codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
B. Handicapped Requirements:
1. Provisions: Provide door hardware meeting requirements of codes, regulations and standards for
providing accessibility and usability for handicapped people.
2. Performance: Door hardware work shall meet most stringent requirements for design, dimensions,
performance, details, construction, accessibility and installation required by codes and regulations
of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work, including but not limited to, Americans
with Disabilities Act and ANSI A117.1. Where requirements of codes, regulations and standards are
in conflict, more detailed or stringent requirements shall be required.
3. Tactile Warning on Doors to Hazardous Areas: Door handles, levers, pulls or other like operating
hardware of doors that lead to areas that might prove dangerous to a handicapped person or as
determined by Architect shall be identifiable to touch by a textured surface on door handle, lever,
pull or other like operating hardware meeting requirements of this Section.
a. Hazardous areas shall include, but not be limited to, alleys, roadways, parking areas, loading
platforms, hazardous material storage rooms, workshops, maintenance rooms, building and
mechanical equipment rooms, electrical vault and equipment rooms, and like rooms and areas.
When applicable, a permissible variation shall be, in place of providing tactile warning for
operating hardware of each door, to provide tactile warning for doors from a controlled space,
such as an office area, to hazardous areas, and from employee entrances to hazardous areas
when not controlled from a controlled room.
b. Tactile warning texture surface shall be factory knurled machined (cross- hatched texture) or
electro discharge machined (embossed texture) into back or bottom metal surface of door
handles, levers, pulls or other like hardware. Applied abrasive texture is not acceptable.
C. Fire Rated Openings:
1. Provide door hardware for fire rated openings meeting requirements of ICC -International Building
Code, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and UL 10C. Provide only door hardware which is UL Labeled for types
and sizes of doors required, and meets requirements of respective fire rated door and door frame.
2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, with supplementary marking on door indicating
Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware, provide UL Label on exit device indicating Fire Exit
Hardware.
D. Hardware Mounting Locations: Provide door hardware at following locations, except as otherwise
required to meet governing regulations and as maybe otherwise directed by Architect:
1. Butt and Pivot Hinges: 10 inches to bottom of lowest hinge from finish floor; 5 inches to top of upper
hinge from top of door; space other hinges equally between bottom and top hinges.
2. Lock and Latch Sets: 38 inches to center of lever or knob from finish floor.
3. Dead Bolts: Center lines of cylinders and thumb turns shall align with center lines of cylinder for lock
sets, except where location conflicts with pull handle or push plate, then provide at consistent
location for the work below pull handle or push plate, or through push plate as applicable and
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -2
18JAN08
• 0
acceptable to Architect. Height shall be between 32 and 48 inches to center from finish floor.
I I
E
4. Exit Device: 38 inches to center of touch pad or cross bar from finish floor.
5. Flush Bolt Operating Mechanisms: Consistent location of 66 to 72 inches to center of top boltfrom
finish floor; 12 inches to center of bottom bolt from finish floor.
6. Door Pulls: 42 inches to center of pull from finish floor; center in 5 inches from edge of flush doors,
and center on width of stile of stile doors.
7. Push Bar: 42 inches to center of push bar from finish floor, unless otherwise indicated for
combination push /pull bar.
8. Push Plate: 42 inches to center of push plate from finish floor; through mounted and concealed by
pulls when applicable. Coordinate with cylinders and thumb turns as required.
9. Mop, Kick and Armor Plates: 1/4 inch from bottom of door and horizontally symmetrical on face of
door when in closed position.
10. Clothes Hook: 72 inches from finish floor to center of mounting base; centered equally across width
of door.
11. Other Items: As indicated in DHI - Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualifications:
1. General: Obtain each kind of door hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers and like items)
from only one manufacturer, even though several may be indicated as acceptable manufacturers.
2. Acceptable Designs:
a. Article - Hardware Set Schedule, at end of this Section, indicates door hardware products which
are of acceptable design, grade, quality, function, operation, performance, exposure and other
like characteristics. Do not change such characteristics of products.
b. Door hardware products of other acceptable manufacturers specified in Part 2, of this Section,
which meet requirements of this Section are also acceptable for respective item of door
hardware.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized door hardware supplier who has been furnishing door hardware
within 100 miles of project site for a period of 5 years minimum, and who employs an experienced
certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), by Door and Hardware Institute, who is available at
reasonable times during course of the work for consultation about hardware and keying requirements
for the work, to Owner, Architect and Contractor, and who is available for post installation maintenance
observation and service.
C. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall specialize in performing installation work of this Section and shall
have 5 years minimum documented experience in installation and maintenance of type and quality
required for work and shall be acceptable to hardware supplier and manufacturers as applicable.
D. Scheduled Designations: Except as otherwise required, use of door hardware designation system of
one manufacturer in schedules does not imply that products of other acceptable manufacturers
indicated in Part 2, of this Section, will not be acceptable, except when products are not acceptable in
AESI 27210
18JAN08
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 -3
G O
design, or not equal in size, weight, finish, function or other quality of significance as determined by
Architect. Do not change products.
E. Discrepancies:
1. Types: Based on requirements indicated by Contract Documents, furnish required types and
finishes of door hardware, including fasteners and maintenance tools, and furnish or replace any
items of door hardware resulting from shortages and incorrect items, at no addition to Contract
Sum. Obtain signed receipts for delivered door hardware.
2. Quantities: Quantities of door hardware indicated by Contract Documents shall not be construed as
actual quantities of door hardware required for the work. Contractor shall be responsible for actual
quantities of door hardware required for proper completion of the work.
F. Pre - Installation Meeting: Conduct a pre - installation meeting at project site prior to starting work at
project site and delivery of products to review conditions associated with performing work. Meeting shall
include review of construction conditions, environmental requirements, ambient conditions, coordination
required for installation of work and responsibility for temporary operation of permanent systems
required for work. Meeting participants shall include Architect, representatives of hardware
manufacturers, installer of work under this Section, installers of related work, including finishes and
electrical work, and Owner personnel responsible for continued operation. Record discussions of
meeting, and agreements and disagreements reached, and furnish a copy of record to each participant.
G. Manufacturer Representative: Provide services of a trained technical representative of manufacturers to
advise on every phase of work and to perform other like services at project site as necessary. As
minimum, representatives shall review and instruct installers on project site in proper techniques for
preparation, installation and adjustment of latches, locks, exit devices, closers and other door hardware
items; in addition for electrified hardware, advise on required components and wire gages, and examine
conditions before installation, and examine completed installation.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Sequence: Submit hardware schedule at earliest possible date. Include with hardware
schedule, product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware and other
information essential to coordinated review of door hardware schedule.
B. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data and installation instructions of manufacturer
for each product. Include published data, certified conformance report or certified laboratory test report
of manufacturer substantiating proposed products meet requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Hardware Schedule:
1. General: Hardware schedule shall be prepared by or under supervision of a certified Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC), by Door and Hardware Institute. Submit hardware schedule in vertical
format in DHI Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule as noted in following
Subparagraph. Number and date each page. Review and acceptance by Owner or Architect does
not relieve Contractor of responsibility to meet requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Format Sample:
Hardware Set 1
Single door A 3a, Corridor to Office 6, RH
T -0" x T -0" x 1 -3/4 WD x HM
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -4
18JAN08
• •
3 Butts 613179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652
1 Lock Set 8205 LW 1 KB 626
1 Wall Stop 60C 626
3 Silencers 64 GRY
3. Electrified Door Hardware: Submit details of electrified door hardware indicating following:
a. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal and control wiring. Include following:
1) System schematic.
2) Point -to -point wiring diagram.
3) Riser diagram.
4) Elevation of each door.
b. Detail interference between electrified door hardware and fire alarm, access control and security
control systems.
c. Operation Narrative: Describe operation of doors controlled by electrified door hardware.
D. Final Hardware Schedule: Organize final door hardware schedule into hardware sets indicating
complete designation of every item required for each door or opening. Coordinate final door hardware
with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper function, hand, size, thickness and finish of door
hardware. Furnish final draft of schedule after samples, product data sheets, coordination with shop
drawings for other work and similar information has been completed and accepted. Include following
information:
1. Type, style, function, hand, size, material, finish and fire rating of each hardware item.
2. Identification designation, name and manufacturer of each item.
3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4. Location of hardware set cross- reference to indications on Drawings, both on floor plans and indoor
and door frame schedule.
5. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, codes and like items contained in schedule.
6. Mounting location for hardware with template information on recessed hardware items.
7. Degree of opening of each door, including limitations by holders, stops, closers and like devices.
8. Door and frame sizes and material.
9. Keying information.
10. Interface information with sequence operation for access control system.
E. Keying Schedule: Submit directly to representative of Owner separate detailed schedule clearly
indicating how final instructions of Owner on keying of locks has been fulfilled. Furnish copy of
transmittal letter to Architect. Keying schedule is for information only.
F. Samples:
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -5
18JAN08
c o
1. Prior to submittal of final hardware schedule and prior to delivery of hardware, submit 1 sample of
each exposed door hardware item, finished as required, and tagged with full description for
coordination with schedule. Sample will be reviewed only for function and visual characteristics and
qualities, including design, color and texture.
2. Samples will be returned. Door hardware items which are acceptable and remain undamaged
through submittal, review and field comparison procedures may after final check of operation and
finish, be used in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Set Packages: Package door hardware, on a set -by -set basis. As door hardware items are received
from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers marked with hardware set number. Each
set shall be packaged in single container. Tag each item or package separately, with identification
related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Deliver
individually packaged hardware items at proper times to proper locations (shop or project site) for
installation.
B. Inventory: Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware
installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct.
C. Accessories: Each item of door hardware shall be complete with necessary screws, bolts, keys,
instructions, and where necessary, installation templates.
D. Storage:
1. Provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to project site, but not installed. Control
handling and installation of hardware items, which are not immediately replaceable, so that
completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.
Door hardware items lost, damaged or stolen shall be replaced at no addition to Contract Sum.
2. Store door hardware off floor in dry areas of building out of way of other work in progress. Provide
maximum protection against loss and damage.
E. Handling: Handle door hardware in a manner to prevent damage. Marred, defaced, damaged and
defective items will be rejected.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate door hardware with doors, door frames and adjacent work. In addition,
coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and
control systems.
B. Existing Openings: Where new door hardware components are scheduled for application to existing
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, verify at project site existing
conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide for
proper operation.
C. Templates: Furnish templates or samples of door hardware and door hardware mounting locations to
manufacturers of doors and door frames as required for proper reinforcement and preparation to
receive door hardware. Where required, furnish physical door hardware to door and door frame
manufacturers for application. Check shop drawings of doors and door frames to confirm adequate
provisions will be made for proper installation of door hardware.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -6
18JAN08
•
1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Data: Furnish operation and maintenance data of manufacturers for door hardware items. Include
instructions for operation, adjustments and maintenance, and parts lists.
B. Instructions: Instruct personnel of Owner in proper adjustments and maintenance of door hardware and
hardware finishes during final adjustment phase of hardware installation.
C. Bitting List: Key bitting list shall be delivered from lock manufacturer directly to representative of Owner
with return receipt. Furnish copy of transmittal letter to Architect.
D. Products: Furnish following hardware items for maintenance:
1. Cylinders: 5 each masterkey set, keyed different.
2. Locks: 2 each function.
3. Exit Devices: 1 each function.
4. Closers: 2 each type.
5. Miscellaneous: 1 each item.
6. Tools: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed for continued adjustment,
maintenance, removal and replacement of door hardware by Owner.
E. Service: Approximately 6 months after acceptance of door hardware in each area, installer shall return
to the work, and inspect and readjust door hardware as required to restore proper function of doors and
hardware. Representatives of lock, latch, exit device and closer manufacturers shall review final
hardware installation and adjustment, ensure proper function of doors and hardware, and consultwith
and instruct personnel of Owner in recommended maintenance procedures. Contractor shall replace
hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of
hardware units. Contractor shall prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of
substantial nature) in performance of door hardware and submit to Owner with copy to Architect.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranty work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except warranty shall include
additional requirements specked in this Article.
B. Coverage:
1. General: Defective materials and workmanship shall include, but not be limited to, abnormal
deterioration, structural failure, cracks or breakage; failure of operating parts to function normally,
deterioration and defacement of finishes in excess of normal wear and aging and exceeding
specified limits, and failure of work to meet performance criteria indicated by Contract Documents.
2. Extent: Warranty shall not include damage caused by vandalism or conditions exceeding
performance criteria indicated by Contract Documents.
3. Corrections: Warranty shall include corrections of work found to be defective or not meeting
requirements of Contract Documents at no addition to Contract Sum. Included, shall be:
a. Removal, replacement and correction of damages resulting from such defects or
nonconformance with Contract Documents, and of other materials and work to extent required to
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -7
18JAN08
repair or replace work, exclusive of repairs required as a result of improper maintenance or
operation, or of normal wear.
b. Removal and replacement of other materials and work covering defective work, to extent
required to repair or replace defective work.
c. Corrective work shall be performed by original installer.
4. Limitations: Include specific statements of any limitations, required maintenance and similar
conditions of warranty.
C. Costs: Warranty shall be without cost limitation and at no expense to Owner.
D. Signatures: Warranty shall be signed by Contractor, installer and manufacturer.
E. Time Period: Extend warranty time period as follows:
1. Exit Devices: 3 years minimum.
2. Closers: 10 years minimum.
3. Low Energy Automatic Operators: 2 years minimum.
4. Electrified Door Hardware: 5 years minimum.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. General:
1. Requirements for design, grade, quality, function, operation, performance, size, exposure and other
like characteristics of each type of door hardware shall be as specified in this Section, including
Article - Hardware Set Schedule, at end of this Section.
2. Provide door hardware items of design, grade, quality, function, operation, performance, exposure
and other like characteristics for use on doors and door frames of thickness, profile, function,
security and similar requirements, as required and necessary for proper installation, function and
operation of each door.
B. Hardware Standards: ANSVBHMA A156 Series as follows, except as otherwise required:
1. Butts and Hinges: A156.1.
2. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: A156.2.
3. Exit Devices: A156.3.
4. Door Controls - Closers: A156.4.
5. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: A156.5.
6. Architectural Door Trim: A156.6.
7. Template Hinge Dimensions: A156.7.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -8
18JAN08
8. Door Control -Overhead Holders: A156.8.
9. Mortise Locks and Latches: Al 56.13.
10. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: All 56.14.
11. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI Al 56.15.
12. Auxiliary Hardware: A156.16.
13. Self- Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI Al 56.17.
14. Materials and Finishes: Al 56.18.
15. Power Assist and Low Energy Operated Doors: Al 56.19.
16. Thresholds: A156.21.
17. Door Gasketing Systems: All 56.22.
18. Electromagnetic Locks: Al 56.23.
19. Continuous Hinge: Al 56.26.
20. Master Keying Systems: Al 56.28.
21. Exit Locks and Alarms: Al 56.29.
22. Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Activators: All 56.31.
C. Hardware Options: One or more acceptable manufacturers or products are listed for each door
hardware type. Provide products meeting requirements of Section 01620 - Product Options.
2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of
hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement.
B. Nameplate:
1. Do not provide products which have manufacturer name or trade name displayed in a visible
location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with required UL labels and as
otherwise acceptable to Architect.
2. Manufacturer identification will be permitted on rim or lock cylinders only.
C. Base Metals: Provide door hardware units of base metal and forming method specified, using metal
alloy, composition, temper and hardness of not less than commercially recognized qualityspecified for
applicable hardware units by ANSUBHMA A156 Series Specifications, but not less than metals of a
quality equal to metal specified for door hardware units and meeting requirements of ANSUBHMA
A15.18. Do not furnish optional materials or forming methods for those indicated.
D. Fasteners:
i t AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -9
18JAN08
0
1. General: Door hardware shall meet published templates prepared for machine screw installation.
a. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible.
b. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for or uses self- tapping or sheet metal
screws, except for application of flush mounted plates with sheet metal screws.
2. Standard: Door hardware shall be installed with fasteners as furnished by hardware manufacturer.
Use of other fasteners or non - standard fasteners is not acceptable and will void any UL Label
requirements and warranties of manufacturer.
3. Type: Provide door hardware items with appropriate type and length of screws or other fastenings
suitable to ensure permanent anchorage. Provide Phillips oval head screws, except as otherwise
required.
a. Fasteners shall be same metal as item fastened, except provide stainless steel fasteners for
aluminum or stainless steel items.
b. Finish of exposed (exposed under any condition) screws shall match hardware finish or, if
exposed in surfaces of other work, shall match finish of such other work as closely as possible,
including prepared for paint in surfaces to receive painted finish.
4. Application: Provide fasteners for mounting hardware items to supporting door and frame of type
and dimensions appropriate for application and coordinated with door and frame material and
construction. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is
closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners.
5. No Penetration: Fasteners shall not penetrate through door or frame. Do not use through fasteners
for installation where part of fastener on opposite face of door is exposed in the Work, exceptwhere
it is not feasible to adequately reinforce work as acceptable to Architect.
6. Anchors: Do not use lead, wood, plastic or fiber type anchors.
E. Finishes:
1. Standard: Provide finishes which match finishes established by ANSUBHMA A156.18, except as
otherwise required.
2. Designations: Designations used in Contract Documents to indicate hardware finishes are those
listed in ANSUBHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional US finishes indicated by certain
manufacturers for their products.
3. Missing Finish: Finish of hardware items not specifically indicated by Contract Documents shall be
BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
4. Quality: Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating, composition, hardness and
other qualities meeting standards of manufacturer, but in no case less than specified for applicable
units of door hardware by referenced standards.
5. Matching: Provide matching finishes for door hardware units at each door or opening, to greatest
extent possible, except as otherwise required. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as
commercially possible where base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of
hardware exposed at same door or opening. In general, match finish of door hardware items to
finish required for latch and lock set, or push -pull units if no latch or lock sets, as acceptable to
Architect.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -10
18JAN08
•
2.03 HINGES
A. General:
1. Type: Provide only template produced hinges and pivots, full mortise and with square comers to be
installed entirely (both leaves) into doors and frames.
2. Screws: Furnish Phillips flat -head all- purpose or machine screws for installation of units, except
furnish Phillips flat -head all- purpose or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw
heads to match surface of hinges.
3. Base Metals and Finishes: As follows, except as otherwise required:
a. Outdoor Doors: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
b. Indoor Doors: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
c. Indoor Doors and unit entry doors Solid Wood Stile and Rail: BHMA 613 (dark satin bronze
toned, oil rubbed).
d. Indoor Doors: BHMA 652 (satin chromium plated steel).
1) General: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
2) General: BHMA 652 (satin chromium plated steel).
3) High Humidity Areas: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
0 4) Warehouse and Maintenance Areas: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
5) Warehouse and Maintenance Areas: BHMA 600 (prime painted steel).
B. Butt Hinges:
1. General: Meet requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.1 and listed in BHMA - Certified Product
Directory, Category A.
2. Five Knuckles and Bearings: Flush barrel style hinges with 5 knuckles and 2 ball bearing races for
standard weight hinges and 4 ball bearing races for heavy weight hinges, except as otherwise
required.
3. Pins:
a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins.
b. Non - ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins.
c. Outdoor Doors: Non - removable pins with security stud.
d. Out -Swing Corridor Doors: Non - removable pins.
e. Indoor Doors: Non - rising pins.
f. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.
1 0 AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -11
18JAN08
C
4. Weight:
a. Outdoor Doors: Heavyweight, 0.180 minimum gage.
b. Indoor Doors:
1) Standard weight, 0.134 minimum gage, for doors up to and including 3' -0" wide.
2) Heavyweight, 0.180 minimum gage, for doors wider than 3' -0 ", for doors 8' -0" and over in
height, and for fire rated doors.
5. Quantities and Sizes:
a. Quantities: Except where fire rated door provisions require larger or heavier hinges or as
otherwise required, provide 3 hinges for each door 90 inches or under in height and one
additional hinge for each additional 30 inches of door height or fraction thereof, except provide 4
hinges for doors with width of 37 to 48 inches.
b. Size -1 -3/4 Inch Thick Doors:
1) To 36 inches wide and 150 pound maximum door weight: 4 -1/2" x4 -1/2" minimum width
hinge.
2) 36 to 47 inches wide and 175 pound maximum door weight: 5" x 4 -1/2" minimum width
hinge.
3) 48 inches wide and over and 230 pound maximum door weight: 6" x 4 -1/2" minimum width
hinge.
c. Size - 2 -1/4 Inch Thick Doors:
1) To 42 Inches Wide: 5" x 5" Heavy Weight.
2) 42 inches wide and over and 230 pound maximum door weight: 6" x 6" minimum width
hinge.
6. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies.
b. McKinney Products Company.
c. Stanley Hardware.
C. Spring Hinges:
1. Description: Self- closing spring hinge meeting requirements of ANSI /BHMA A156.17 and listed in
BHMA - Certified Product Directory, Category A.
2. Available Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies.
b. McKinney Products Company.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -12
18JAN08
c. PBB, Inc.
d. Stanley Hardware.
D. Electric Butt Hinges:
•
1. Description: Electric butt hinges shall meet requirements and be matching in design as required by
Contract Documents for butt hinges, and shall provide for concealed constant flow of current from
jamb to door and have non - removable pin feature. Electric butt hinges shall be UL Labeled. Unit
shall operate on electrical current of characteristics indicated by Contract Documents. Refer to
Division 16 - Electrical for electrical requirements and wiring interface connections.
a. Capacity: 1 amp, and 24 Volts per circuit.
b. Leads: Quantity of wires required for functions of 12 inch minimum length. Wires shall be
contained within hinge, invisible and tamperproof.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies.
b. McKinney Products Company.
c. Stanley Hardware.
E. Continuous Gear Hinges:
1. Description: Heavy duty continuous geared hinges with twin joint so rotating surface turns only half
distance as in a pin hinge, for same degree of opening meeting requirements of ANSVBHMA
A156.26 and BHMA - Certified Products Directory, Category N. Gear design shall maintain each
leaf in alignment for full length of hinge resulting in uniform door swing. Hinge leaves shall be in
rolling contact with each other, minimizing lateral wear eliminating door sag. Provide fire pins for
doors requiring UL A Label (3 hour).
2. Base Metal and Finish: BHMA 628 (satin aluminum clear anodized)
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Bommer Industries Inc.
b. Hager Companies.
c. McKinney Products Company.
F. Thrust Pivots:
1. Description: Provide heavy duty thrust pivots on each door X -6" or more in width which is subject to
medium to high frequency usage or when door movement is arrested by door closer or holder. Both
leaves of thrust pivot shall be concealed with only pivot being exposed when door is closed. Pivot
point shall align with butt hinge pivot point. Coordinate size with butt hinge size.
2. Base Metal and Finish: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
3. Base Metal and Finish: BHMA 652 (satin chromium plated steel).
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -13
18JAN08
G D
4. Acceptable Products:
a. Lawrence Brothers, Inc., TPU -1 Series.
G. Offset Pivot Hinges:
1. Description: Heavy duty offset pivot hinge sets, top, bottom and intermediate. Pivots shall meet
requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.4 and BHMA - Certified Product Directory, Category C. Pivots
shall be constructed of forged bronze, be capable of supporting extra high or wide doors, and have
finish required by Contract Documents. Pivot sets shall match in design for all doors.
a. Weight: Heavy weight.
b. Offset: Provide 3/4 inch offset measured from centerline of pivot to face of door and to face of
jamb unless otherwise required by Contract Documents.
c. Spindles: Provide extended spindles to raise door above finish floor for concealment of floor
mounting plate.
d. Ends: Ends of barrel shall be flush (flat).
2. Quantities: Except where fire rated door provisions require larger or heavier pivots or as otherwise
required, provide top, bottom and intermediate pivots, for each door 90 inches or under in height,
and one additional intermediate pivot for each additional 30 inches of door height or fraction thereof,
except provide 4 pivots for doors with width of 37 to 48 inches.
3. Finish: As specified in Paragraph - General, of this Article, except finish of pivots for doors with an
exposed finish shall match finish of respective door as acceptable to Architect.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Glynn- Johnson.
b. Hager Companies.
c. Rixson Specialty Door Controls.
H. Pocket Pivot Hinges:
1. Description: Provide for door to be fully recessed into wall pocket.
2. Base Metal and Finish: BHMA 652 (satin chromium plated steel).
3. Base Metal and Finish: BHMA 600 (prime painted steel).
4. Acceptable Products:
a. Dor- O -Matic, Model 91105F Series.
2.04 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Supplier shall meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final keying
instructions in writing from Owner.
B. Lock Cylinders:
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -14
18JAN08
1. Standard Lock Cylinders: Meet requirements of ANSUBHMA A156.5, Grade 1, except as otherwise
40
required.
2. High Security Lock Cylinders: Meet requirements of ANSUBHMA Al 56.30, Grade 1, except as
otherwise required.
a. Key Control Level: Category A.
b. Destructive Test Level: Category A.
c. Surreptitious Entry Resistance Level: Category A.
3. Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass, bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver, and
meeting following:
a. Keyway: Standard, except as otherwise directed by Owner.
b. Number of Pins: 6 pin minimum, except as otherwise directed by Owner.
c. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight or clover type cam.
d. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring.
e. Bored Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. In addition for high security grade locks,
provide cylinders meeting requirements of ANSUBHMA A156.5, Grade 1A, listed and labeled as
meeting requirements of UL 437 (Suffix A) for pick and drill resistance.
4. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as required for lock sets, except if otherwise
} required for interchangeable cores.
C. Keying System: Review keying system with Owner and provide type required (master, grandmaster or
great - grandmaster). Integrated with existing keying system. Meet instructions of Owner for master
keying and, except as otherwise required, provide individual change key for each lock which is not
designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
1. General: Provide factory registered keying system meeting guidelines of ANSUBHMA Al 56.28,
Appendix A.
2. Removable Cores: Door locks shall have interchangeable core or removable core cylinders keyed
to meet instructions of Owner. Face shall match lock set.
3. Construction Keying - Removable Core: Provide removable core construction keying and cylinders.
Equip locks with cylinders for interchangeable or removable core pin tumbler inserts. Furnish
temporary cores for construction period, and remove cores. Contractor shall provide permanent
cores, except as otherwise required by Contract Documents or directed by Owner.
D. Key Material: Nickel silver only.
E. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, 5
grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system and quantity of construction keys as required.
1. Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
2. Deliver keys to representative of Owner.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -15
18JAN08
F. Identification:
1. Masterkeys shall be identified with a registry number, not stamped with MASTER or letter M.
2. Stamp keys with identification code and stamp cylinder cores with identification code in an area
other than cylinder face for security. Keys shall not be stamped with bitting number.
3. Keys shall be stamped DO NOT DUPLICATE.
G. Keys and Cylinders -Removable Cores: Deliver permanent keys and cylinders from lock manufacturer
directly to Owner representative with return receipt.
1. At a mutually agreed time, Contractor and hardware supplier shall meet with Owner at project site
for installation of cores and to assure Owner that keys are not duplicated and not in possession of
unauthorized people.
2. During installation of cylinders, locks shall be checked for proper operation and verified for key
identification.
2.05 KEY CONTROL
A. Key Control - Manual:
1. Description: Provide key control system including envelopes, labels, tagswith self - locking keycips,
receipt forms, 3 -way visible index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal
cabinet, as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacityfor 150 percent of the numberof
locks required for the Work.
a. Provide complete cross index system and place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as
determined by final key schedule.
b. Provide multiple drawer type cabinet.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Lund Equipment Company.
b. Telkee, Inc.
B. Fire Department Key Boxes:
1. Description:
a. Recessed type fire department key boxes with lock at locations required. Key boxes shall meet
requirements of local fire department hinge door and shall be UL Listed and Marked for rapid
entry system. In addition, provide each key box with hinge door and UL Listed alarm tamper
switch to be connected to building security system. Finish color, if not dictated by local fire
department, shall be standard color of manufacturer as selected by Architect.
b. Keying shall be as required by local fire department.
c. Secure authorized fire department signatures to obtain key boxes.
d. Install knox boxes meeting requirements of local fire department and instructions and J1
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -16
18JAN08
0 •
recommendations of manufacturer.
0 2. Acceptable Products:
a. Knox Company, Number 3270.
2.06 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Mortise Locks and Latches:
1. Locks and latches shall be heavy duty units meeting requirements of ANSUBHMA A156.13, Grade
1, Series 1000 and BHMA - Certified Product Directory, Category F.
2. Electrical locking devices shall meet requirements of ANSUBHMA Al 56.25.
3. Locks and latches for means of egress doors shall meet requirements of NFPA 101. Latches shall
not require more than 15 pounds of force to release latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool
or special knowledge for operation.
4. Lock sets shall have armor fronts, except as otherwise required.
5. Lock and latch cases shall be heavy gage wrought steel, zinc dichromate plated.
6. Working parts shall be heavy gage, corrosion resistant, steel.
7. Back set shall be 2 -3/4 inches.
8. Hubs shall be cold forged brass.
9. Levers shall be cold forged or cast one piece solid metal same as exterior base metal. Infill
materials or hollow levers are not acceptable.
10. Levers for handicapped requirement for doors that lead to hazardous areas shall meet
requirements of Article - System Description, Paragraph - Handicapped Requirements, of this
Section. Provide tactile texture as specified.
11. Spindles from hub to levelers shall be heavy duty hardened steel construction of one piece 5/16
inch minimum size or multiple piece 3/8 inch minimum size.
12. Springs for lever functions shall be heavy duty.
13. Rose shall be wrought metal same as exterior base metal.
14. Cylinder collar shall be solid metal of straight cylindrical design with inside and outside rims of same
diameter (not tapered), and with square edges, as acceptable to Architect.
15. Dead bolts shall be forged stainless steel or forged brass with hardened steel inserts.
16. Provide 3/4 inch minimum throw of latch bolts and 1 inch minimum throw of dead bolts. Meet UL
requirements for throw of bolts on fire rated openings.
17. Latch bolt shall be stainless steel, 3 -piece anti - friction type. Anti- friction piece shall be stainless
steel.
18. Trim shall be through bolted with heavy cast posts and bolts.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -17
18JAN08
t� D
19. Where rabbeted door stiles are required, provide special rabbeted front on lock and latch units and
bolts.
B. Cylindrical Locks and Latches:
1. Locks and latches shall be heavy duty units meeting requirements of ANSVBHMAA156.2, Grade 1,
Series 4000 and BHMA - Certified Products Directory, Category F.
2. Housings shall be heavy gage wrought steel, zinc dichromate plated.
3. Working parts shall be heavy gage, corrosion resistant, steel.
4. Backset shall be 2 -3/4 inches.
5. Levers shall be one piece solid metal. Infill materials or hollow levers are not acceptable.
6. Levers for handicapped requirement for doors that lead to hazardous areas shall meet
requirements of Article - System Description, Paragraph - Handicapped Requirements, of this
Section. Provide tactile texture as specified.
7. Sleeve assembly shall be heavy duty one piece steel construction.
8. Springs for lever functions shall be heavy duty.
9. Rose shall be wrought metal same as exterior base metal.
10. Provide 1/2 inch minimum throw of latch bolts and 1 inch minimum throw of dead bolts. Meet UL
requirements for throw of bolts on fire rated openings.
11. Trim shall be through bolted with heavy cast posts and bolts.
12. Where rabbeted door stiles are required, provide special rabbeted front on lock and latch units and
bolts.
C. Strikes: Provide metal box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame,
finished to match lock or latch set.
D. Base Metals and Finishes: As follows, except as otherwise required:
1. Outdoor Doors - Cylindrical: BHMA 682 (satin chrome plated zinc).
2. Indoor Doors - Mortise:
a. General: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
b. General: BHMA 626 (satin chromium plated brass).
c. Maintenance Areas: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
3. Indoor Doors - Cylindrical: BHMA 682 (satin chrome plated zinc).
r? '
3
C 1 t
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -18
18JAN08
E. Acceptable Products - Lock Sets and Latch Sets - Mortise, Non - Return Lever Design:
0 1. Best Access Systems, Series 35H, Design 16H (Lever 16 and Rose H) x Series B -35100 cylinder
collar.
2. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, Series ML2000, Design CSA (Lever CS and Rose A) x
Sargent Series 1 KB cylinder collar.
3. Sargent Manufacturing Company, Line 8200, Design LNB (Lever 1445B and Rose 695LN) xSeries
1 KB cylinder collar.
4. Schlage Lock Company, Series L9000, Design 07A (Lever 07 and Rose A) x Blocking Cylinder
Collar 36 -082 x Compression Spring 36 -083.
5. Yale Security Inc., Series 8700FL, Design MOR (Lever MO and Rose CO) x Sargent 1 KB cylinder
collar.
F. Acceptable Products - Lock Sets and Latch Sets - Mortise, Return Lever Design:
1. Best Access Systems, Series 35H, Design 14H (Lever 14 and Rose H) x Series B -35100 cylinder
collar.
2. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, Series ML2000, Design PSA (Lever PS and Rose A) x
Sargent Series 1 KB cylinder collar.
3. Sargent Manufacturing Company, Line 8200, Design LNP (Lever 1445P and Rose 695LN) xSeries
1 KB cylinder collar.
4. Schlage Lock Company, Series L9000, Design 17A (Lever 17 and Rose A) x Blocking Cylinder
Collar 36 -082 x Compression Spring 36 -083.
5. Yale Security Inc., Series 8700FL, Design PBR (Lever PB and Rose CO) x Sargent Series 1 KB
cylinder collar.
G. Acceptable Products - Lock Sets and Latch Sets - Cylindrical, Non - Return Lever Design:
1. Best Access Systems, Series 9K, Design 16D (Lever 16 and Rose D).
2. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, Series CL3300, Design AZD.
3. Sargent Manufacturing Company, Line 10, Design LB (Lever B and Rose L).
4. Schlage Lock Company, Series D, Athens (Lever 03 -030 and Rose 03 -042).
5. Yale Security Inc., Series 5400L, Design MO.
6. Baldwin Hardware Corporation 5106.402 Estate Lever.
H. Acceptable Products: Lock Sets and Latch Sets - Cylindrical, Return Lever Design:
1. Best Access Systems, Series 9K, Design 14D (Lever 14 and Rose D).
2. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, Series CL3300, Design PZD.
3. Sargent Manufacturing Company, Line 10, Design LL (Lever L and Rose Q.
it AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -19
18JAN08
4. Schlage Lock Company, Series D, Sparta (Lever 03 -030 and Rose 03 -042).
5. Yale Security Inc., Series 5400L, Design PB.
2.07 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Auxiliary Locks:
1. Description: Heavy duty units meeting requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.5, Grade 1 and BHMA -
Certified Products Directory, Category E, except as otherwise required.
2. Available Manufacturers:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.
b. Best Access Systems.
c. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
d. Schlage Lock Company.
B. Push Button Combination Locks:
1. Description: Heavy duty units meeting requirements of ANSVBHMA Al 56.5, Grade 1 for cylindrical
and Grade 2 for mortise locks.
2. Available Manufacturers:
a. Kaba Ilco Inc.
2.08 EXIT DEVICES
A. Description:
1. Type: Heavy duty units meeting requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.3, Grade land BHMA- Certified
Product Directory, Category G. Provide touch pad or push bar type exit devices as indicated in
Hardware Set Schedule with smooth operating mechanism. Operating devices shall meet ADA
requirements.
2. Means of Egress Doors: Meet requirements of NFPA 101. Exit devices shall require 15 pounds
force maximum to release latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool or special knowledgefor
operation.
3. Panic: Use shall be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
bearing on performance of the Work, for panic protection, when evaluated meeting requirements of
UL 305.
4. Fire: Meet requirements of NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities bearing on performance of the Work, for fire and panic protection, when
evaluated meeting requirements of UL 305 and NFPA 252.
5. Removable Mullions: Provide removable mullions for use with fire exit devices meeting
requirements of NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities bearing on performance of the Work, for fire and panic protection, when evaluated
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -20
18JAN08
•
meeting requirements of UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for
which they have been tested.
6. Electronic Exit Bars: Non - latching electronic releasing device, activated by an adjustable
capacitance sensor, with no moving parts; listed and labeled as panic exit hardware. Fabricate bar
from extruded aluminum, and provide door and frame transfer device and 16 feet of cord to route
wiring off door frame.
7. Dogging: Except on fire rated doors, wherever closers are provided on doors equipped with exit
devices, equip exit devices with cylinder dogging device to hold push bar down and latch bolt in
open position.
8. Trim: Exit device trim shall have heavy duty cast metal matching design for lock sets.
B. Base Metals and Finishes: As follows, except as otherwise required:
1. Outdoor Doors: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
2. Indoor Doors: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
C. Acceptable Products - Touch Pad Type, Wide Chassis Style:
1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, Series ED5000.
2. Sargent Manufacturing Company, Series 80.
3. Von Duprin, Inc., Series 98.
i
4. Yale Security Inc., Series 7100.
2.09 BOLTS
A. General:
1. Bolt Throw: Meet testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire rated doors, and
as follows:
a. Half -Round Surface Bolts: 7/8 inch minimum throw.
b. Interlocking Surface Bolts: 15/16 inch minimum throw.
c. Fire Rated Surface Bolts: 1 inch minimum throw, listed and labeled for fire rated doors.
d. Dutch Door Bolts: 3/4 inch minimum throw.
e. Mortise Flush Bolts: 3/4 inch minimum throw.
2. Dustproof Strikes: ANSVBHMA Al 56.16, Grade 1.
B. Manual Flush Bolts:
1. Description: Heavy duty units meeting requirements of ANSI /BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, designed for
mortising into door edge.
a. Steel rods, zinc dichromate plated, of 1/2 inch minimum diameter and 12 inch minimum length
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -21
18JAN08
E
for doors to 7' -0" height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7' -0" height.
b. Provide 3/4 inch minimum throw of bolts. Meet UL requirements for throw of bolts on fire rated
openings.
c. Provide recessed type top strikes for bolts locking into frame heads, except as otherwise
required.
d. Provide dustproof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides
non - recessed strike for bolt.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Builders Brass Works Corp.
b. Door Controls International.
c. Glynn- Johnson.
d. H. B. Ives.
e. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co., Inc.
C. Automatic Flush Bolts:
1. Description: Heavy duty units meeting requirements of ANSUBHMA A156.3, Grade 1, designed for
mortising into door edge, for top and bottom of inactive leaf of a coordinated pair of doors. When
active leaf is opened, bolts retract automatically and inactive leaf is free to open. When active leaf
closes, trigger of bolt is depressed which activates bolt linkage assembly securing inactive leaf.
a. Steel rods, zinc dichromate plated, of 1/2 inch minimum diameter and 12 inch minimum length
for doors to 7' -0" height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7' -0" height.
b. Provide 3/4 inch minimum throw of bolts. Meet UL requirements for throw of bolts on fire rated
openings.
c. Provide recessed type top strikes for bolts locking into frame heads, except as otherwise
required.
d. Provide dustproof strikes without flanges for foot bolts, except where special threshold
construction provides non - recessed strike for bolt. Top surface of strike shall be flush with top
surface of finish floor.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Builders Brass Works Corp.
b. Door Controls International.
c. Glynn- Johnson.
d. H.B. Ives.
e. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co., Inc.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -22 Vj
18JAN08
e •
n
D. Constant Latching Flush Bolts:
1. Description: Provide one constant latching bolt at top and automatic bolt at bottom.
a. Provide a constant latching bolt when active door leaf is open. Top bolt shall remain engaged
until plunger on face is depressed. Bottom bolt shall automatically retract every time active door
leaf is opened, depressing plunger shall allow inactive door to open.
b. Provide 3/4 inch minimum throw with a 2 inch vertical adjustment, UL Listed for fire rated doors.
c. Bolts shall have steel and stainless steel components. Removable face plates shall be BHMA
630 (satin stainless steel).
d. Provide recessed type top strikes for bolts locking into frame heads.
e. Provide dustproof strikes for foot bolts.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Glynn- Johnson, F69 for metal doors and FB10 for wood doors.
b. Hager Companies, 293D for metal doors and 294D for wood doors.
2.10 PUSH /PULL UNITS
A. Pull Handles: Pull handles shall be 10 inches center to center vertically, offset at 90 degrees if
horizontal center to center dimension is less than 8 inches, 2 -1/2 inches projection, 1 inch diameter,
concealed mounting.
B. Push/Pull Bars: Push /pull bars shall be door stile to stile horizontally, 2 inches nominal projection, 1
inch diameter, concealed mounting or back to back mounting as applicable.
C. Fastening: Provide concealed fastener system for installation; through bolted for matched pairs, but not
for single units.
D. Base Metals and Finishes: As follows, except as otherwise required:
1. Outdoor Doors: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
2. Indoor Doors: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies.
2. Hiawatha Inc.
3. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co., Inc.
4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
2.11 CLOSERS
A. General:
AESI 27210
18JAN08
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 -23
1. Size of Units: Except as otherwise required, meet instructions and recommendations of
manufacturer for size of each door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather
and anticipated frequency of use.
2. Means of Egress Doors: Meet requirements of NFPA 101. Door closers shall require 30 pounds
force maximum to set door in motion and 15 pounds force maximum to open door to minimum
required width.
3. Hold -Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate with interface integral smoke detector and closer device
with fire alarm system.
4. Access Free (Reduced Opening Force) Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for
doors required to be accessible to physically handicapped, provide adjustable units meeting
requirements of ADA and ANSI A117.1 for door opening force and delayed action closing.
5. Pressure Check: Closers shall not have pressure relief valves or like devices which allow door to
open in an uncontrolled manner.
6. Attachment to Doors: Mount surface applied hardware for wood doors attached with fasteners
which do not penetrate through door. For wood doors, screws shall penetrate 1 -1/2 inches
maximum.
B. Overhead Surface Closers:
1. Description: Surface mounted with body of high strength metal construction, with brackets, drop
plates and other accessories required to insure proper installation meeting instructions and
recommendations of manufacturer, and full rectangular removable plastic cover, except where
metal cover is required.
a. Closers shall meet requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.4, Grade 1 and BHMA - Certified Product
Directory, Category C, 1,500,000 cycle as evaluated and certified meeting requirements of ANSI
A156.4, except as otherwise required.
b. Rack and pinion shall be one piece precision machined alloy steel, heat treated.
c. Spindle shall be machined from a single piece of high tensile alloy steel, heat treated, operating
with 2 needle bearings.
d. Springs shall be high tensile and heat treated.
e. Closers for outdoor and vestibule doors shall be non -sized to provide a full range of Size 1 to 6
closing power.
f. Closers shall utilize temperature stable hydraulic fluid capable of withstanding temperature
range of 120 to -30 degrees Fahrenheit without requiring seasonal adjustments of closer speed
to properly close door.
g. Closers shall have independent non - critical valves for closing, latching and back check shall be
needle type with O -ring seals.
h. Closers shall have adjustable spring power capable of adjustment to suit door conditions and
shall be non - handed. Provide parallel arm closers one size larger than recommended for use
with standard arms.
L Parallel arm closers shall incorporate one piece solid forged steel arms with bronze bushings.
Other closers shall have forged steel main arms.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -24
18JAN08
•
j. Steel stud shoulder bolts shall be incorporated in regular arms, hold open arms, arms with stop
built -in, arms with hold open and stop built -in.
k. Where closers with built -in positive stops are used, stops shall be of one piece cast malleable
iron. Where required, hold open assembly handle for those stops shall rotate on ball bearings.
I. Provide closers for 180 degree door opening where partition or wall construction will permit.
m. Closers shall be universal mount. Top jamb and corner bracket mount is not permitted, except
provide top jamb invert mount for outdoor doors opening out. Mount closer and provide type of
arm required for closer to be located on non - public or secure side of door. Provide type of arm
required.
n. Wherever possible, provide closers with parallel arms.
o. For aluminum door and frames, provide reinforcing to prevent failure of attachment and
damage.
p. Provide fasteners for mounting closers to supporting door leaf and frame of type appropriate and
coordinated with door and frame material and construction.
2. Finish: BHMA 689 (satin aluminum painted) as acceptable to Architect, except as otherwise
required, on closer body, arm, cover and adapter plate.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Dor- O- Matic, SC71 Series.
it . b. LCN Closers, 4041 Series.
c. Norton Door Controls, 7500 Series.
d. Sargent Manufacturing Company, 351 Series.
C. Combination Overhead Surface Closers and Holders:
1. Description:
a. Provide units designed to hold door in open position under normal usage and to release and
automatically close door under fire conditions. Incorporate an integral electromagnetic holder
mechanism designed for use with UL Listed fire detectors, provided with normally closed
switching contacts. Coordinate voltage and electrical characteristicswith available electric power.
b. Provide integral smoke detector device in combination door closers and holders meeting
requirements of UL 228.
2. Finish: BHMA 689 (satin aluminum painted) as acceptable to Architect, except as otherwise
required.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. LCN Closers.
b. Norton Door Controls.
is AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -25
18JAN08
G O
c. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
d. Yale Security Inc.
2.12 COORDINATORS
A. Stop Strip Coordinators:
1. Description: Door coordinator for paired doors which prevents active door from closing before
inactive door, by means of a lever and trigger mechanism, for mounting to head stop strip of door
frame, of variable length per door opening, UL Listed for fire rated doors, and meeting applicable
requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.3.
a. Coordinator shall have a safety mechanism which allows active door to close first, if under
extreme pressure, preventing damage to coordinator, hinges and door.
b. Coordinator shall have adjustable holding power, override feature to prevent damage to doors
and frame, and shall be compatible with flush bolts.
c. Provide filler bar as required to cover remaining portion of head stop strip, to maintain
architecturally clean lines.
d. Provide mounting brackets to allow head stop strip mounted hardware to be properly installed
without damaging coordinator.
e. For situations when inactive door can be opened first, provide carry bar.
2. Base Metal and Finish: Aluminum or steel prime painted.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Glynn- Johnson, COR Series Coordinators.
2.13 DOOR CONTROLS
A. Electromagnetic Holders:
1. Description:
a. Units shall meet requirements of ANSIBHMA A156.15, BHMA - Certified Product Directory,
Category C, ICC - International Building Code, NFPA 80 and NFPA 101, and be UL Labeled and
of fail -safe operation which allows door to close whenever circuit is interrupted. Holding force
shall be 35 pounds. Equip units for manual operation of door, to any degree of swing, without
effecting automatic closing feature, including no necessity of resetting device. Unit shall clear
trim from door. Unit shall operate on electrical current of characteristics indicated by other
Contract Documents. Refer to Division 16 - Electrical for automatic circuit interrupting methods in
addition to those specified in this Paragraph and for electrical requirements and wiring interface
connections.
1) Provide wall mounted units, except provide floor mounted devices wherever wall mounted
devices cannot be used.
2) Provide units with high load capacity indirect mechanical release.
Avmk
AES127210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -26 VIP
18JAN08
•
EA
3) Mount units at top or bottom rail of door as required for application, 6 inches from lock stile
edge of door.
b. Provide following types of circuit interrupting devices to electrically release unit in a single, series
or parallel circuiting system:
1) Manual release by manually pulling door from unit.
2) Fire alarm generated switch release for integration with building fire alarm system, UL
Labeled.
3) Smoke and heat detector switch release for local activation, UL Labeled.
2. Finish: BHMA 689 (satin aluminum painted) or BHMA 628 (satin aluminum clear anodized).
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. LCN Closers, Sentronic Series.
b. Rixson - Firemark Inc., 900 Series.
c. Sargent Manufacturing Company, 1500 Series.
2.14 PROTECTION PLATES AND TRIM
A. General: Meet applicable requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.6.
B. Fasteners: Provide exposed fasteners for door trim units (kick plates, edge trim, viewers, knockers, mail
s drops and similar units), either machine screws, sheet metal screws or wood screws as applicable.
C. Push Plates: Fabricate push plates of required metal, 8" x 16" x0.050" minimum thickness, except as
otherwise required, and with four edges beveled. Cut for cylinders and thumb hums as required. Do not
penetrate plates with through bolts for mounting pulls on opposite side of doors.
D. Protection Plates: Fabricate protection plates (mop, kick or armor) of required metal, 0.050 inch
minimum thickness by height required, 1/2 inch smaller than door width on hinge side and 1 -1/2 inches
smaller than door width on door side opposite hinges, and with top and side edges beveled.
1. Mop Plates: 4 inches high.
2. Kickplates: 8 inches high.
E. Edge Trim: Fabricate edge trim of required metal, not more than 1/2 inch nor less than 1/16 inch
smaller in length than door dimension.
F. Base Metal and Finish: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel), except as otherwise required.
G. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies.
2. Hiawatha Inc.
3. H. B. Ives.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -27
18JAN08
O
4. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co., Inc.
5. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
2.15 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Meet applicable requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.16, Grade 1, or ANSVBHMA A156.8,
Grade 1, as applicable for type stop or holder.
B. Wall Stops: Provide wall mounted, wrought metal, convex rubber bumper, door stop with concealed
fastenings, where door swings against wall or other obstruction. Wall mounted door stops shall not be
used on stud partitions.
C. Overhead Stops/Holders: Provide heavy duty combination overhead surface stop/holder surface
mounted or concealed for doors where wall stops cannot be used and where floor stops create tripping
hazard or cleaning obstruction. Stops shall have heavy duty shock absorbing spring system.
D. Floor Stops: Furnish floor mounted, dome type, cast metal, rubber bumper, door stop with fastenings
only when wall stops or overhead stops cannot be used. Coordinate height of floor stop with floor
condition and undercut of door.
E. Roller Stops: Furnish roller stop when swing of one door may contact another door.
F. Base Metals and Finishes:
1. Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel).
2. Overhead Surface Stops: BHMA 630 (satin stainless steel), except as otherwise required.
3. Floor Stops: BHMA 626 (satin chromium plated bronze).
4. Roller Stops: BHMA 626 (satin chromium plated bronze).
G. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Architectural Builders Hardware Manufacturing Company.
2. Glynn- Johnson.
3. Hager Companies.
4. H. B. Ives.
5. Rixson - Firemark Inc.
6. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
7. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
2.16 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Meet requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.21 and BHMA - Certified Product Directory, Category
J.
B. Profile: Saddle type profile with no raised steps or other projecting item and meeting required size
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -28
18JAN08
7
requirements. For outdoor and vestibule doors, provide threshold with thermal barrier. Provide return
closed ends when threshold end would otherwise be open in the completed work.
1. Width: As required by respective sill detail, but 4 inches minimum.
2. Height: 1/2 inch maximum.
C. Surface Pattern: Plain tread with non -slip surface, except smooth surface when door bottom is
required.
D. Base Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum, smooth commercial finish, except as otherwise required.
E. Thicknesses: Provide units with required minimum thicknesses, exclusive of any surface pattern
grooves.
1. Extrusions: 0.125 inch for direct tread surfaces, 0.10 inch for secondary tread surfaces and 0.0625
inch for unexposed flanges and legs.
2. Formed Metal: 0.10 inch.
a
F. Construction: Single piece or multiple piece construction for each application meeting
recommendations of manufacturer.
G. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies.
2. National Guard Products, Inc.
3. Pemko Manufacturing Company.
4. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
5. Wooster Products, Inc.
6. Zero Weather Stripping Co., Inc.
2.17 STRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Meet requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.22 and BHMA- Certified Product Directory, Category
J.
B. Continuity: Except as otherwise required, stripping at each opening shall be continuous and without
unnecessary interruptions at door corners and hardware.
C. Replaceability: Resilient or flexible seal strips of each unit shall be easily replaceable and readily
available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
D. Sound Stripped Doors: Door stripping and seals required for purpose of sound stripping or acoustical
doors, shall provide a continuous and uninterrupted contact around entire perimeter of door so that no
open cracks remain when door is closed. Seals shall be evaluated for required STC rating based on
requirements of ASTM E1408.
E. Cold Smoke Stripping:
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE
18JAN08
08710 -29
V
1. Description: Provide fire rated door assemblies with cold smoke stripping of adhesive backed bulb
type, of resilient and self -extinguishing elastomeric material, surface applied, and which is UL 10C
Labeled for required fire resistance rating. Provide cold smoke stripping for fire rated door
assemblies regardless if not indicated in Hardware Set Schedule.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. National Guard Products, Inc., 5050.
b. Pemko Manufacturing Company, S88.
F. Hot Fire Stripping:
1. Description: Where not provided by door manufacturer or as indicated in Hardware Set Schedule,
provide intumescent strip seals as required by UL 10C to prevent passage of smoke between door
and door frame. Seals shall be a unit assembly of both hot and cold smoke seals.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. National Guard Products, Inc., 9500 x 5050.
b. Pemko Manufacturing Company, HSS3000 xS88.
G. Energy Efficiency: Provide doors located in exterior walls and between conditioned and unconditioned
spaces with weatherstripping to limit air leakage into or from space. Air leakage shall be 0.50 cfm
maximum per linear foot of length for gasketing other than for smoke control when evaluated meeting
requirements of ASTM E283.
H. Weatherstripping: Provide types of weatherstripping required, sized and properly prepared for
attachment to supporting units.
1. Jambs and Head - Stop Type: Provide weatherstripping at jambs and head of bumper type,
including a resilient insert and metal retainer strip, surface applied, except when required to be
mortised or semi - mortised, of following metal, finish and resilient bumper materials.
a. Housing: Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062 inch minimum thickness main
walls and flanges.
b. Seal: Weather resistant neoprene bumper seals.
2. Door Bottoms: Provide threshold contact type weatherstripping at door bottom, including resilient
insert and metal housing of design and size required; of following metal, finish and resilient seal
strip:
a. Housing: Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062 inch minimum thickness main
walls and flanges.
b. Seal: Brush seal of nylon with aluminum strip backing.
3. Automatic Drop Seal: Provide automatic drop seal door bottom unit with operating metal seal bar
retained in metal housing and capable of operating to close a 3/4 inch gap from door bottom to floor
or threshold. House mechanism and operating bar in housing, for mounting on doors:
a. Housing: Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish on exposed surfaces; 0.062 inch
minimum thickness walls and flanges.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -30
18JAN08
• s
b. Mounting - Mortised: Mortised at center of door.
c. Seal: Brush seal of nylon with aluminum strip backing.
d. Strike Plate: Wherever units are indicated to be used with wood door frames, provide metal
strike plates for plunger operation.
4. Meeting Stiles: Provide meeting stiles for pairs of doors with both leafs active, with metal strips
retaining flexible stripping seals as follows:
a. Housing: Extruded aluminum stripping with natural anodized finish, 0.062 inch minimum
thickness and with adjustable contacts.
b. Seal: Brush seal of nylon and aluminum strip backing.
I. Astragal: Provide meeting edge for pair of doors with metal astragal bar, not less than 1/8"x 1 -3/4" for
exposed flat head screw mounting on one leaf as follows:
1. Cold rolled steel, prime paint finish.
J. Drip Caps: Provide extruded aluminum drip caps on exterior side of outdoor doors:
1. At head of outswing doors where frame is flush with outdoor wall.
2. At bottom of doors directly above threshold.
K. Acceptable Manufacturers, Except as Otherwise Specified:
1. Hager Companies.
2. National Guard Products, Inc.
3. Pemko Manufacturing Company.
4. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
5. Sealeze Corporation.
6. Zero Weather Stripping Co., Inc.
2.18 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Junction Boxes:
1. Description: Hot -dip zinc coated sheet steel junction box to protect wire for electric hardware for
attachment to jamb and of size required for application.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies.
b. McKinney Products Company.
c. Stanley Hardware.
AES127210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -31
18JAN08
B. Silencers:
1. Description:
a. General: Doors in metal and wood frames shall have silencers in frames, except when doors
requiring stripping do not require silencers because stripping performs such function as
acceptable to Architect. Provide 3 for each single door and 2 for each of a pair of doors.
b. Design: Meet requirements of ANSUBHMA Al 56.16, Grade 1. Design shall provide for fitting
silencers into holes in door frames. Stick -on or self- adhesive design is not acceptable.
2. Material and Finish: Synthetic rubber, gray color.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Glynn- Johnson.
b. Hager Companies.
c. H. B. Ives.
d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
C. Roller Latches:
1. Description: Heavy duty, adjustable roller latch with associated stops and mutes.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Glynn- Johnson, 1152B.
b. Hager Companies, 318S.
c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company, 593.
D. Coat Hooks:
1. Description: Double hook, coat and hat, of 2 -1/2 inches maximum projection and nominal 7/8 inch
wide by 1 -1/2 inch high base.
2. Base Metal and Finish: BHMA 628 (cast aluminum with satin finish).
3. Acceptable Products:
a. H. B. Ives, Coat and Hat Hook 405.
2.19 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide complete set of hardware for interior sliding doors when not furnished as part of
complete door package. Meet requirements of ANSUBHMA A156.14.
B. Operating Hardware - Bi- passing Doors:
1. Description: Provide complete set consisting of extruded aluminum overhead track, adjustable
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -32
18JAN08
• •
hangers (carriages), bumpers and floor guides designed to accommodate number, size, thickness
and weight of door leaves. Provide flush pulls for each door leaf.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies.
b. Stanley Hardware.
C. Operating Hardware - Pocket Doors:
1. Description: Provide complete set consisting of extruded aluminum or galvanized steel overhead
track, adjustable hangers (carriages), galvanized steel split jambs and split studs, wood nailers for
head track, jambs and studs, galvanized steel brackets for assembly and attachment to floor and
wall framing, bumpers, and nylon floor guides designed to accommodate number (single and
biparting), size, thickness and weight of door leaves. Provide flush pull and edge pull for each door
leaf.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies.
b. Stanley Hardware.
2.20 BIFOLD DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide complete set of hardware for interior bifold doors when not furnished as part of
complete door package. Meet requirements of ANSVBHMA A156.14.
B. Operating Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of overhead extruded aluminum track; captive
nylon shoe or roller guides; rubber bumpers in track; and adjustable pivots, hinges, and door aligners
all designed to accommodate the number, size, thickness and weight of door leaves.
1. Provide light duty sets designed for leaves weighing up to 25 pounds.
2. Provide medium duty sets designed for leaves weighing up to 35 pounds.
3. Provide heavy duty sets designed for leaves weighing up to 75 pounds.
4. Provide extra heavy duty sets designed for leaves weighing up to 125 pounds and 4 feet in width
with a minimum thickness of 1 inch.
C. Trim Hardware: Provide following items as needed for operating bifold doors:
1. Pulls: Pull, one per pair of leaves.
2. Pulls: Single knob pull with dummy rose matching design and finish of knobs for swing doors, by
manufacturer of locks and latches, as acceptable to Architect.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies.
2. Stanley Hardware.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -33
18JAN08
D 4
3. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which door hardware is to be installed for compliance
with requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of door
hardware are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
resolved. Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
B. Suitability: Examine doors, frames and door hardware for damage, defects and suitability for intended
use. Restore parts or items found damaged defective or inadequate or replace with good material
before installation.
C. Examine rough -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before
electrified door hardware installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Locations: Mount hardware units at locations specified in Article - System Description,
Paragraph - Hardware Mounting Locations, of this Section, otherwise as indicated in DHI -
Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware, except as otherwise required to meet governing
regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect.
B. Installation: Install each door hardware item meeting instructions and recommendations of
manufacturer. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which
are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or
application of surface protections with finishing work. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes
have been completed on substrate.
1. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
C. Dustproof Strikes: Install dustproof strikes without flanges for foot bolts, except where special threshold
construction provides non - recessed strike for bolt. Top surface of strike shall be flush with top surface
of finish floor.
D. Thresholds:
1. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames with mitered corners, return bevels
and hairline joints. Joint units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut openings
for spindles, bolts and similar items providing uniform and smooth surfaces.
2. Screw thresholds to substrate with Number 10 or larger screws, of proper type for permanent
anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel to match threshold metal and finish. For heavy duty cast
metal thresholds, provide 3/8 inch minimum diameter screws.
3. At outdoor doors, and elsewhere as required, set thresholds in a bed of butyl rubber sealant to
completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture penetration from every source. Do not plug
drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant.
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -34
18JAN08
0 i
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant:
1. Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform
inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
2. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report
whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. General: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door, to ensure proper
(free and smooth) operation and function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to
operate freely and smoothly as intended for application made.
B. Lubrication: Lubricate bearing surfaces of moving parts. Adjust latching and holding devices to proper
function. Adjust door control devices to proper speed and power. Test keys for conformance to
acceptable keying system. Clean exposed surfaces; check for surface damage and polish.
C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month priorto acceptance or
occupancy of a space or area, return to the Work during week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and
make final check and adjustment of door hardware in such space or area. Clean operating items as
necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final air movement, including effects from operation of heating, ventilating and air
conditioning equipment.
0 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an
open position of 30 degrees.
2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities bearing on performance of the Work, adjust
sweep so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, door will take 3 seconds minimum to move to a
point 3 inches from latch, measured to leading edge of door.
D. Occupancy Adjustment: Approxamately 6 months after date of Substantial Completion, Architectural
Hardware Consultant of installer shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each
item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware and electrified door
hardware.
E. Defective Work: Where door hardware is found defective in materials or installation, rework, restore,
replace or otherwise correct. Following will be considered defective:
1. Unauthorized substitutes.
2. Product re- engineered by manufacturer without prior review by Owner and Architect.
3. Items with missing, broken, damaged or defaced parts.
4. Items incomplete, misaligned or incorrectly located.
5. Items of incorrect hand or function.
3.05 HARDWARE SET SCHEDULE
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -35
18JAN08
LM
A. General:
J
1. Guide: Door hardware items have been placed in sets which are intended to be a guide to design,
grade, quality, function, operation, performance, exposure and other like characteristics of door
hardware, and may not be complete. Manufacturer and product description is listed for each door
hardware for purpose of installing a guide or minimum requirements. Provide door hardware
required to make each set complete and operational. See other requirements of this Section
relating to type, design, grade, quality, function, operation, performance, exposure and like
characteristics of door hardware items.
a. Hardware set schedule does not reflect hand, backset, method of fastening and like
characteristics of door hardware and door operation.
b. Review door hardware sets with door types, sizes and details, and verify function of each item.
c. Door hardware items scheduled may indicate a reference for type, quantity, size, function or like
characteristic required. If no such reference is indicated, assign proper quantity, type, size,
function or like characteristic to door hardware item.
2. Reference: Provide door hardware sets as indicated on Drawings and in this Schedule. Hardware
set designations specified correspond to set designations indicated on Drawings.
3. Product Designations: Acceptable manufacturers whose product designations appear in this
Schedule are as follows:
a. Butt Hinges: Stanley Hardware (Stanley).
b. Thrust Pivots: Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (Lawrence).
c. Pocket Pivot Hinges: Dor- O -Matic (DOM).
d. Locks and Latches: Sargent Manufacturing Company (Sargent).
e. Electric Locks: Security Door Controls (SDC).
f. Electric Dead Bolts:
g. Electric Strikes:
h. Electromagnetic Locks:
i. Exit Control Locks: Detex Corporation ( Detex).
j. Exit Alarms: Detex Corporation ( Detex).
k. Padlocks: Best Access Systems (Best).
I. Exit Devices: Von Duprin, Inc. (Von Duprin).
m. Flush Bolts: Glynn- Johnson (GJ).
n. Coordinators: Glynn- Johnson (GJ).
o. Dustproof Strikes: Glynn- Johnson (GJ).
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -36
18JAN08
F
•
u
p. Push/Pull Units: Rockwood Manufacturing Company (Rockwood).
q. Overhead Closers: Sargent Manufacturing Company (Sargent).
r. Floor Closers: Rixson- Firemark Inc. (Rixson).
s. Door Controls:
t. Protection Plates and Trim: Rockwood Manufacturing Company (Rockwood).
u. Stops and Holders: Glynn- Johnson (GJ).
v. Thresholds: National Guard Products, Inc. (National).
w. Stripping and Seals: National Guard Products, Inc. (National).
n
x. Door Operators: Horton Automatic (Horton).
y. Silencers: Glynn- Johnson (GJ).
z. Coat Hooks: H. B. Ives (Ives).
aa.Sliding Doors:
bb. Bifold Doors:
B. HARDWARE SETS:
AESI 27210
18JAN08
Hardware Set 1 - Entrance /E)dt:
Butt Hinges
1 E)at Device
1 Strike
1 Overhead Surface Closer
1 Overhead Surface Stop
1 Threshold
1 Weatherstripping - Head
and Jambs
3 Silencers
GJ 64
GRY
Hardware Set 1A — Double Door Entrance /E)dt:
Butt Hinges
2 E)dt Devices
2 Strikes
1 Mullion
2 Push Plates
1 Overhead Surface Closer
2 Kick Plates
2 Floor Stops
1 Threshold
1 Weatherstripping - Head
630
Von Duprin
XP 99 Series with outside lever
630
Von Duprin
909
630
LCN
4040
691
GJ
90S
630
National
425
628
National
160AS 628
GJ 64
GRY
Hardware Set 1A — Double Door Entrance /E)dt:
Butt Hinges
2 E)dt Devices
2 Strikes
1 Mullion
2 Push Plates
1 Overhead Surface Closer
2 Kick Plates
2 Floor Stops
1 Threshold
1 Weatherstripping - Head
630
Von Duprin
XP 99 Series with outside lever
630
Von Duprin
909
630
Von Duprin
9854
630
Rockwood
BF110 x 70C x Cut for Cyl
630
LCN
4040
691
Rockwood
0.050 x 10 x 133E x Push Side
GJ
FB -36
National
425
628
National
700DkB x Silicone
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 -37
0
and Jambs
Hardware Set 2 - Entrance /Ebt, Fire rated w / hold open:
Butt Hinges
Butt Hinges
630
1 E)at Device
Von Duprin
XP 99 Series with outside lever
630
1 Strike
Von Duprin
909
630
1 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
1 Magnetic Hold Open
Rixson
900 Series
630
1 Threshold
National
425
628
1 Smoke Seals - Head
National
9500 x 5050
---
and Jambs
GJ
FB -36
Hardware Set 3 - Entrance /E)at Fire rated:
Butt Hinges
Butt Hinges
630
1 E)at Device
Von Duprin
XP 99 Series with outside lever
630
1 Strike
Von Duprin
909
630
1 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
1 Overhead Surface Stop
GJ
90S
630
1 Threshold
National
425
628
1 Smoke Seals - Head
National
9500 x 5050
---
and Jambs
GJ
FB -36
Hardware Set 3A— Double Door Entrance /E)at Fire rated:
Butt Hinges
Butt Hinges
630
2 E)at Devices
Von Duprin
XP 99 Series with outside lever
630
2 Strikes
Von Duprin
909
630
1 Mullion
Von Duprin
9854
630
2 Push Plates
Rockwood
BF110 x 70C x Cut for Cyl
630
1 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
2 Kick Plates
Rockwood
0.050 x 10 x B3E x Push Side
National
2 Floor Stops
GJ
FB -36
1 Threshold
National
425
628
1 Smoke Seals - Head
National
9500 x 5050
---
and Jambs
Hardware Set 4 — Passage:
Butt Hinges
Butt Hinges
630
1 Latch Set
Sargent
8215 (ANSI F01)
630
1 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
2 Kick Plates
Rockwood
0.050 x 10 x 133E
630
1 Overhead Surface Stop
GJ
90S
630
3 Silencers
GJ
64
GRY
Hardware Set 4A — Passage, Weatherproof:
Butt Hinges
630
1
Latch Set
Sargent
8215 (ANSI F01)
630
1
Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
2
Kick Plates
Rockwood
0.050 x 10 x 133E
630
1
Overhead Surface Stop
GJ
90S
630
1
Weatherstripping - Head
National
700DkB x Silicone
AESI 27210
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 -38
18JAN08
and Jambs
IV Hardware
Set 4B - Passage, Fire Rated:
Butt Hinges
630
1 Latch Set
Sargent
8215 (ANSI F01)
630
1 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
2 Kick Plates
Rockwood
0.050 x 10 x 133E
630
1 Overhead Surface Stop
GJ
90S
630
1 Smoke Seals - Head
National
9500 x 5050
---
and Jambs
Hardware Set 5 — Privacy:
Butt Hinges
630
1 Lock Set
Sargent
8256 (ANSI F07)
630
1 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
1 Overhead Surface Stop
GJ
90S
630
3 Silencers
GJ
64
GRY
Hardware Set 6 - Storage Room:
Butt Hinges
630
1 Lock Set
Sargent
8204 (ANSI F07)
630
1 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
1 Kick Plate
Rockwood
0.050 x 10 x B3E x Push Side
630
1 Wall Stop
GJ
50W
630
3 Silencers
GJ
64
GRY
Hardware Set 6A - Storage Room (Weatherproof):
Butt Hinges
630
1 Lock Set
Sargent
8204 (ANSI F07)
630
1 Wall Stop
GJ
50W
630
1 Weatherstripping - Head
National
700DkB x Silicone
and Jambs
Hardware Set 6B - Storage Room (Fire
Rated):
Butt Hinges
630
1 Lock Set
Sargent
8204 (ANSI F07)
630
1 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
1 Kick Plate
Rockwood
0.050 x 10 x 133E x Push Side
630
1 Wall Stop
GJ
50W
630
1 Smoke Seals - Head
National
9500 x 5050
---
and Jambs
Hardware Set 7 - Storage, Pair:
Butt Hinges
630
1 Lock Set
Sargent
8204 (ANSI F07)
630
1 Manual Flush Bolts
GJ
FB6
626
1 Dustproof Strike
GJ
DP1
1 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
2 Overhead Surface Stop
GJ
90S
630
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE
08710 -39
18JAN08
Hardware Set 20 - Cylinder Only:
1 Cylinder Sargent
END OF SECTION
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -40
18JAN08
2 Kick Plates
Rockwood
0.050 x 10 x 133E x Push Side
630
4 Silencers
GJ
64
GRY
Hardware Set 7A - Storage, Pair (Weatherproof):
Butt Hinges
630
1 Lock Set
Sargent
8204 (ANSI F07)
630
1 Manual Flush Bolts
GJ
F136
626
1 Dustproof Strike
GJ
DP1
652
2 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
2 Kick Plates
Rockwood
0.050 x 10 x B3E x Push Side
630
2 Overhead Surface Stop
Rockwood
90S
630
1 Weatherstripping - Head
National
700DkB x Silicone
---
and Jambs
1 Weatherstripping - Meeting
National
158 SDKB
---
Stile
4 Silencers
GJ
64
GRY
Hardware Set 7B - Storage, Pair (Fire Rated):
Butt Hinges
630
1 Lock Set
Sargent
8204 (ANSI F07)
630
1 Manual Flush Bolts
GJ
FB6
626
1 Dustproof Strike
GJ
DP1
652
2 Overhead Surface Closer
LCN
4040
691
2 Kick Plates
Rockwood
0.050 x 10 x B3E x Push Side
630
2 Overhead Surface Stop
Rockwood
90S
630
1 Smoke Seals - Head
National
9500 x 5050
---
and Jambs
1 Smoke Seals - Meeting Stile
National
115N
628
4 Silencers
GJ
64
GRY
Hardware Set 20 - Cylinder Only:
1 Cylinder Sargent
END OF SECTION
AESI 27210 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -40
18JAN08
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL, INC. SECTION 08800
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and
Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Glazing is indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary and
incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
C. Included: Glazing includes, but is not limited to, following:
1. Primary glass.
2. Rolled glass.
3. Processed glass units.
4. Fabricated glass units.
5. Accessories.
D. Schedules:
1. Glass Types: Required types of glass include, but are not limited to, types specified and scheduled
in Part 2 of this Section.
2. Glazing Systems: Required glazing systems include, but are not limited to, systems scheduled in
Part 3 of this Section:
E. Related Work:
1. Glazing required to be provided as part of single responsibility work.
2. Non - framed glass mirrors.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. ANSI Z97.1 - Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Materials Used in
Buildings.
2. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings.
3. CPSC 16CFR1201 - Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials.
4. GANA - Glazing Manual.
5. GANA - Sealant Manual.
6. GTA - Engineering Standards.
7. NGA - Guide to the Glass and Glazing Requirements of the Model Building Codes.
8. SIGMA - Standards and Recommendations.
B. Performance Basis:
AESI 27210 GLAZING 08800 -1
18JAN08
An
Glazing: Descriptions and requirements indicated by Contract Documents establish basic
arrangements, visual concepts, profiles and sightlines, dimensions and modules of glazing units,
performance, function and like requirements. Within these limitations, work shall meet visual
concepts, performance criteria and like requirements indicated by Contract Documents, and include
components not indicated but necessary for performance and function, and to be a complete
system. Perform modifications only as necessary to meet requirements of Contract Documents and
to coordinate the work, subject to acceptance by Architect. Maintain performance criteria without
altering basic arrangements and visual concepts. Variations in details and products shall not
adversely affect appearance, performance, strength and durability. Provide complete drawings and
data of proposed modification.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. General: Work shall meet performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents, including
requirements specified in this Paragraph and like requirements specified in other parts of this
Section.
2. Loading and Movements: Meet requirements of Section 01415 -Performance Requirements.
3. Glass Design:
a. Load Resistance: Meet requirements of ASTM E1300 and requirements of Contract Documents.
b. Factor of Safety: Minimum design factor of safety for glass shall be as follows:
1) Vertical Position: 2.5 (eight lites per thousand breakage ma)amum at design wind
pressure).
2) Sloped and Horizontal Position: 5.0.
3) Center Deflection: 0.50 inch ma)amum, based on loading required for glass framing
c. Glass Sizes: Dimensions of glazing rabbets indicated by Contract Documents are intended to
provide for minimum bite on glass and minimum edge clearance under positive and negative
wind loads, dead and live loads, vertical deflections, seismic forces, solar loads, temperature
changes and impact loading for operating sash and doors, and adequate thicknesses for
accessory glazing materials, with reasonable tolerances. Provide correct glass size for each
opening, within established tolerances and dimensions and meeting required performance
requirements.
d. Thickness:
1) General: As required and as instructed and recommended by glass manufacturer for
application and loading required for glass framing; 1/4 inch minimum.
2) Coated Glass: Coated glass shall be of one thickness for the entire work.
4. Safety Glass:
a. General: Where safety glass is indicated by Contract Documents or required by codes and
regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work, provide products which
meet requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201, Category II materials.
AESI27210 GLAZING 08800 -2
18JAN08
b. Label: Provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing
Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
c. Location: Provide safety glass in light openings of doors and door sidelights, and in other
locations required by Contract Documents and as required by safety glazing regulations of public
authorities bearing on performance of the work. In case of conflict, more stringent requirements
shall govern.
5. Fire Resisting Glass:
a. General: Provide fire resisting glass which is UL Classed and Marked for fire resistance.
b. Location: Provide fire resisting glass in light openings of fire rated doors, openings of borrowed
lights located in fire rated walls, and in other locations required by Contract Documents and as
required by fire resistant regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. In case of conflict, more
stringent requirements shall govern.
6. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on
spacers or at least one component pane of units with appropriate certification label of one of
following inspecting and testing organizations:
a. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
b. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI).
7. Glazing Sealant and Gasket Color: Color of glazing sealants and gaskets exposed in the
completed work shall be black, except as otherwise required. Wherever material is not exposed to
view, provide manufacturer standard color which will meet required performance requirements and
provide best overall performance for application.
8. Accessory Glazing Materials:
a. Hardness: Hardness of glazing sealants and gaskets, and accessory glazing materials shall
meet instructions and recommendations agreed upon by glass manufacturer and accessory
glazing material manufacturers, based upon location of each application, conditions at time of
each installation and required performance requirements.
b. Sizes and Shapes: Provide size and shape of glazing gaskets, tapes and like items meeting
instructions and recommendations of manufacturer.
c. Compatibility:
1) Before selection and purchase of each glazing sealant, gasket and other accessory glazing
materials, investigate compatibility of materials with each other and with surfaces to be
contacted in installation. Provide only materials, including manufacturer recommended
variation or modification of specified materials, which are completely compatible with actual
installation conditions as indicated by published data or certification and proven by test of
manufacturer.
2) Compatibility investigation shall include following conditions:
a) Interlayer of laminated glass units.
AESI 27210 GLAZING 08800 -3
18JAN08
p 4
b) Sealant edges of insulating glass units.
3) Sealant manufacturer shall conduct standard adhesion tests specified in referenced
standards or specifications to verify compatibility of sealants with adjacent materials.
Materials tested and preparation and installation procedures used on tests shall be identical
to materials, and preparation and installation procedures to be incorporated in the work.
Manufacturer shall issue a certification of compatibility and satisfactory adhesion of
materials tested.
9. Installations:
a. Glazing system shall provide sufficient support for required loadings, including but not limited to,
minimum positive and negative pressure loads, dead and live loads, vertical deflections, seismic
drift, solar loads, temperature changes, and impact loading for operating sash and doors.
b. Glazing systems shall allow water or accumulated moisture to freely drain or escape to exterior,
and not collect and stand, so that lower edges of glass units will not be in contact with water.
c. Installation of each glass unit shall be weather tight (watertight and airtight) and durable.
1) Installation shall withstand minimum positive and negative pressure loads, dead and live
loads, vertical deflections, seismic drift, solar loads, temperature changes, and impact
loading for operating sash and doors, without failure of any kind, including loss or breakage
of glass, failure of glazing sealants or gaskets to remain weathertight, deterioration of
glazing materials and other defects in the work.
2) Glazing sealants and gaskets shall be free of adhesion and cohesion failures; be resistant
to abrasion, weather, extrusion, migration and staining, and not to deteriorate in any manner
as an inherent quality of material.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualifications: Provide products produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind
and condition of glass required and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each
type and class required.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have 5 years minimum documented experience in design,
detailing, fabrication, installation and maintenance of type and quality glass and glazing required for
work and shall be acceptable to glass manufacturer. Upon request, provide proof of qualifications.
C. Pre - Installation Meeting: Conduct a pre - installation meeting at project site prior to delivery of products
to review condition associated with performing work under this Section. Meeting shall include review of
construction conditions, substrate conditions, environmental conditions, ambient conditioning and
coordination required for installation of work. Meeting participants shall include Architect,
representatives of manufacturers of glass and accessory glazing materials, installer of the work under
this Section and installers of related work. Record discussions of meeting, and agreements and
disagreements reached, and furnish a copy of record to each participant. Proceed with installation only
when everyone concerned agrees that required conditions can be provided and maintained.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data and handling, installation, cleaning and
AES127210 GLAZING 08800 -4
18JAN08
•
protection instructions of manufacturer for each type glass, glazing sealant and gasket, and accessory
glazing material. Include published data, certified conformance report or certified laboratory test report
of manufacturer substantiating each proposed product meets requirements of Contract Documents and
is proven compatible by testing with each other material in each glazing system identical to systems to
be used in the work and with actual installation condition.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of work showing each different
glazing system. Include profile and dimensions of glazing rabbet, glass bite and edge clearance
dimensions, glass thickness, dimension of space between glass and frame, and description of each
material to be used in glazing system.
C. Samples:
1. Glass: Submit 12 inch square samples of each type glass required. Reviewof samples byArchitect
will be only for visual characteristics and qualities, including color, texture and severity of surface
distortions.
a. Laminated Glass Units: Laminated glass units with each different glass and interlayer.
b. Insulating Glass Units: Samples need not be hermetically sealed, but edge construction shall be
accurately represented.
c. Exposed Glass Edges: Each edge condition to be exposed in completed work for each type and
thickness of glass unit.
2. Accessory Glazing Materials: Submit 12 inch long samples of each type glazing sealant, gasket
and accessory glazing material, of each color required, to be exposed to view in completed work.
Install sample between strips of same material to represent where glazing material will be used,
spaced to represent typical joint widths. Review of samples by Architect will be only for visual
qualities.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. General: Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling meeting instructions
and recommendations of manufacturer and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage
to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture, including surface condensation, of temperature
changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes.
B. Insulating Glass Units: Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes,
avoid hermetic seal ruptures by meeting recommendations of insulating glass unit manufacturer for
venting and sealing.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits
permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet.
2. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 degrees Fahrenheit.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
AESI 27210 GLAZING 08800 -5
18JAN08
r�
A. Manual: Furnish complete data of manufacturer for preventative and corrective maintenance of
installed work. Include instructions for replacement, replacement materials list and like data.
B. Demonstrations: Provide demonstrations to designated personnel of Owner covering correct
maintenance of work.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranty work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except warranty shall include
additional requirements specked in this Article.
B. Coverage:
1. General: Defective materials and workmanship shall include, but not be limited to, abnormal
deterioration, aging of weathering of the work; leakage of water or air exceeding specified limits,
structural failure of components resulting from exposure to pressures and forces up to specified
limits, deterioration or discoloration in excess of normal weathering and aging, glass breakage
resulting from any type defect in glass unit, and failure of the work to fulfill other specified
performance requirements. Warranty shall not include damage caused by vandalism or nature
conditions exceeding design criteria and performance requirements. However, warranty does
include failures or defects for which causes cannot be determined.
2. Coated Glass: In addition, warranty shall provide against failure of adhesion, cracking and
deterioration in metallic film coating.
3. Tempered Glass: In addition, warranty shall provide against breakage from any type inclusion,
including nickel sulphide stones, embedded in glass.
4. Laminated Glass Units: In addition, warranty shall provide against laminated glass units failure in
lamination, including evidence of delamination, loss of transparency; change in color, light
transmittance and other visual characteristics; dust or film formation on internal glass surfaces,
deterioration of concealed glass coatings or plastic interply film and other forms of deterioration due
to defective materials or workmanship.
5. Insulating Glass Units: In addition, warranty shall provide against insulating glass units deterioration
and loss of hermetic seal, including dust or film formation and condensation on internal glass
surfaces.
C. Signatures: Warranty shall be signed by Contractor, installer and manufacturer of glass, and glazing
sealants and gaskets, as applicable.
D. Time Period: Extend warranty time period as follows:
1. Coated Glass: 5 years.
2. Tempered Glass: 5 years.
3. Laminated Glass Units: 5 years.
4. Insulating Glass Units: 5 years.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
AES127210 GLAZING 08800 -6
18JAN08
•
2.01 PRIMARY GLASS
A. Clear Float Glass:
•
1. Description: ASTM C1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing
select) and as follows for 1/4 inch thick glass:
a. Light Transmittance:
1) Visible: 89 percent.
2) Solar: 79 percent.
3) Ultraviolet: 66 percent.
b. Light Reflectance:
1) Visible Outdoors: 8 percent.
2) Visible Indoors: 8 percent.
3) Solar Outdoors: 7 percent.
c. U- Values (ASHRAE):
1) Winter Nighttime: 1.09 Btu•h•ft
2) Summer Daytime: 1.03 Btu•h•ft
d. Shading coefficient: 0.96.
e. Relative Heat Gain: 206 Btu • h • ft • F.
f. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.82.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. AFG Industries, Inc.
b. Guardian Industries Corp.
c. Pilkington /Libby- Owens -Ford Co.
d. PPG Industries, Inc.
e. Saint - Gobain /Euroglass.
f. Visteon Glass Systems.
2.02 ROLLED GLASS
A. Wired Glass:
1. Description: ASTM C1036, Type II (patterned and wire glass, flat), Class 1 (translucent), Form 1,
Quality q8 (glazing); meeting requirements of ANSI A97.1; 1/4 inch minimum; of form and mesh
pattern as scheduled in Article - Glass Schedule, of this Section. When indicated in Article - Glass
Schedule, of this Section, wire glass shall be UL Classified and Marked for fire resistance.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. AFG Industries, Inc.
b. Guardian Industries Corp.
c. Pilkington Sales (North America) Limited.
2.03 PROCESSED GLASS
A. General: Meet other requirements of this Section relating to properties of glass which make up
AESI 27210 GLAZING 08800 -7
18JAN08
processed glass and to Article - Glass Schedule, of this Section, for respective glass type.
B. Spandrel Glass - Ceramic Coating:
1. Description:
a. Glass that has been heat treated as scheduled and simultaneously processed with a ceramic
coating. Glass shall meet requirements for heat strengthened glass or fully tempered glass as
applicable.
b. Ceramic coating shall be permanently adhered and made an integral part of one surface of
glass as scheduled. Ceramic coating shall be 0.0015 inch minimum thickness. Color of
ceramic coating shall be as scheduled.
c. Coating shall be free of defects, and coated glass shall have an uniform finish color and
aesthetic appearance.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Oldcastle Glass, Inc.
b. Viracon, Inc.
C. Heat - Treated Glass:
1. General:
a. Fabricate glass to sizes and shapes required for installation prior to heat strengthening, including
any bored holes or decorations. Heat strengthened glass to meet GTA - Engineering Standards.
Glass shall be free of marks from heat treatment process.
b. Flatness of glass after heat treatment shall be within allowable tolerances stated in GANA -
Glazing Manual.
c. Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat - treated glass by one of following processes:
1) By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion parallel with bottom edge of
glass as installed.
2) By vertical (tong -held) process, free of tong marks.
2. Heat Strengthened Glass: Glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending not
less than 2.0 times annealed glass strength; meeting requirements of ASTM C1048, Kind HS.
3. Tempered Glass:
a. General: Glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending not less than 4.5
times annealed glass strength; meeting requirements of ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered),
ANSI Z97.1, CPSC 16CFR1201 and safety glazing regulations of authorities having jurisdiction,
and each unit permanently labeled.
b. Heat Soak: At option of Contractor, heat soak tempered glass, after tempering, to minimize risk
of breakage from any type inclusion, including nickel sulphide stones, embedded in glass without
reduction of glass strength.
AESI27210 GLAZING 08800 -8
18JAN08
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. AFG Industries, Inc.
b. Guardian Industries Corp.
c. Oldcastle Glass, Inc.
d. Saint - Gobain /Euroglass.
e. Viracon, Inc.
2.04 FABRICATED GLASS UNITS
•
A. General: Refer to other requirements of this Section relating to properties of glass which make up
fabricated glass units and to Article - Glass Schedule, of this Section, for respective glass type.
B. Laminated Glass Units:
1. Description:
a. Preassembled glass units consisting of multiple plies of glass and plastic interlayer film as
adhesive, laminated at factory by pressure - plus -heat process; meeting requirements of ASTM
C1172.
b. Plastic Interlayer:
n
1) Description: Film of polyvinyl butyral (PVB) of color, transparency and thickness as
scheduled, but not less than 0.030 inch thick. Composition shall be such that film
successfully withstands a minimum of 20 years a )posure to sunlight, severe weather and
temperature changes with no bubbles, discoloration and loss of physical and mechanical
properties after laminating glass and installation.
2) Acceptable Products:
a) E. I. DuPont de Nemours & Co., Inc., Butacite.
b) Monsanto Co., Saflex
c. When scheduled laminated glass units shall be:
1) Safety glass, meeting requirements of ANSI Z97.1, CPSC 16CFR1201 and safety glazing
regulations of governing authorities, and permanently labeled.
2) Rated and certified for specified noise reduction.
3) Rated and certified for specified burglary resistance, security applications or bullet
resistance.
d. Fabricate units to sizes and shapes required for installation, including any bored holes.
Laminated glass units shall meet requirements of LSGA - Standards Manual.
e. Laminated glass units shall be free of dirt, foreign material, air pockets and other defects, and to
have a uniform finish color and aesthetic appearance.
f. Component thicknesses may be varied when necessary to achieve required performance as
acceptable to Architect. Glass plies shall be laminations of same thickness.
AESI 27210 GLAZING
18JAN08
08800 -9
G
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Globe Amerada Glass Co.
b. Guardian Industries Corp.
c. Oldcastle Glass, Inc.
d. Viracon, Inc.
C. Insulating Glass Units:
1. Description:
a. General: Preassembled glass units consisting of multiple panes of glass enclosing one or
multiple spaces as scheduled which are hermetically sealed with organic sealant; meeting
requirements of ASTM E774, Performance Class A; guidelines, performance and quality
assurance of SIGMA. Insulating glass units shall be certified by IGCC with a CBA Rating or
certified by ALI with a comparable rating as acceptable to Architect.
1) Space between panes shall be filled with dehydrated air, except as otherwise required.
2) Provide for barometric pressure differences between location of fabrication and installation,
and in shipment route, as applicable.
b. Performance Basis: Performance characteristics indicated by Contract Documents for insulating
glass units are nominal values based on published test data of manufacturer for units with 1/4
inch thick panes of glass and 1/2 inch wide space filled with dehydrated air, except as otherwise
required.
c. Sealing System: Dual seal. Primary sealant polyisobutylene. Secondary sealant silicone.
d. Spacer Material: Aluminum with welded or soldered sealed corners.
e. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both.
f. Appearance: Insulating glass units shall be free of dirt, foreign material, smudges and other
defects, and to have a uniform finish color and aesthetic appearance.
g. Noise: When scheduled, insulating glass units shall be rated and certified for required noise
reduction.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. AFG Industries, Inc.
b. Guardian Industries Corp.
c. Oldcastle Glass, Inc
d. Viracon, Inc.
2.05 GLAZING SEALANTS AND TAPES
A. General: Provide products of type required and meeting requirements specified in Article - Quality
Assurance, of this Section and requirements specified in this Article.
B. Silicone Glazing Sealant:
1. Description: ASTM C920, Type S; Grade NS, Class 25; Uses NT, G, A and as applicable for Uses
0; and meeting requirements for modulus and additional joint movement capability. Sealant shall be
recommended by manufacturer for non - structural and structural glazing applications and for
adhesion to nonporous and porous surfaces.
a. Medium Modulus: Tensile strength of not less than 45 nor more than 75 pounds per square inch
at 100 percent elongation when evaluated meeting requirements of ASTM D412 after 14 days at
AES127210 GLAZING 08800 -10
18JAN08
•
77 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity.
b. Additional Capability: When evaluated meeting requirements of ASTM C719 for adhesion and
cohesion under maximum cyclic movement, to withstand 50 percent increase and decrease of
joint width, as measured at time of application, and remain in compliance with other
requirements of ASTM C920.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Dow Corning Corporation, 795 Silicone Building Sealant.
b. General Electric Company, Ultraglaze SSG 4000.
c. Tremco, Inc., Spectrum 2.
C. Preformed Glazing Tape:
1. Description: Highly adhesive and elastic extruded preformed tape of 100 percent solid, solvent free,
crosslinked butyl polyisobutylene meeting requirements of AAMA 804.1 and AAMA 807.3; no cold
flow, no oil exudation, non - staining and non - migrating when in contact with nonporous surfaces, and
packaged in rolls with a release paper on one side. Provide without or with continuous built -in spacer
shim and of size as required and recommended by manufacturer for application.
2. Acceptable Products - Without Spacer Shim:
a. H. B. Fuller Company, PT1606.
b. Pecora Corporation, Extru -Seal.
c. Tremco Incorporated, Tremco 440 II Tape.
3. Acceptable Products - With Spacer Shim:
a. H. B. Fuller Company, PTI 606 Pre -Shim.
b. Pecora Corporation, Dyna -Seal.
c. Tremco Incorporated, POLYshim II Tape.
2.06 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets:
Description: Molded or extruded gaskets of dense elastomeric neoprene, EPDM or silicone meeting
requirements of ASTM C864; as required for compatibility with contact materials, no oil exudation,
black and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. When required for
performance or scheduled, provide compression gaskets which are factory fabricated into single,
continuous, joint free units with molded corners for each glass and frame application. Mitered and
bonded or sealed corners or like joints are not acceptable.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. D. S. Brown Co.
AESI 27210 GLAZING 08800 -11
18JAN08
b. Maloney Precision Products Co.
c. Tremco, Inc.
B. Cellular Compression Gaskets:
Description: Molded or extruded closed cell, integral skinned neoprene meeting requirements of
ASTM C509, Type II; as required for compatibility with contact materials, no oil exudation, black and
of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. When required for performance or
scheduled, provide compression gaskets which are factory fabricated into single, continuous, joint
free units with molded corners for each glass and frame application. Mitered and bonded or sealed
corners or like joints are not acceptable.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. D. S. Brown Co.
b. Maloney Precision Products Co.
c. Tremco, Inc.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
B. Setting Blocks: Solid blocks of dense elastomeric neoprene, EPDM or silicone meeting requirements of
ASTM C864, as required for compatibility with contact materials, no oil exudation; 80 to 90 Shore A
durometer hardness.
C. Spacers: Solid blocks or continuous extrusions of dense elastomeric neoprene, EPDM or silicone
meeting requirements of ASTM C864, as required for compatibility with contact materials, no oil
exudation; of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass manufacturer for application. Provide
with anchoring feature to prevent blocks from movement (walking) when compressed and released.
D. Architectural sash divisions: Provide between- the -glass aluminum spacers in frame colorand finish for
emulated divided lights in insulating glass units. Provide frame color and finish extruded aluminum
shapes permanently affixed to exterior surface of glass for emulated divided lights in single glazed units.
Configuration of divisions as shown on drawings.
E. Edge Blocks: Solid blocks of dense elastomeric neoprene, EPDM or silicone meeting requirements of
ASTM C864, as required for compatibility with contact materials, no oil exudation; of size, shape and
hardness recommended by glass manufacturer for application. Provide with anchoring feature to
prevent blocks from movement (walking) to limit lateral movement (side - walking) of glass when
compressed and released.
F. Compressible Filler Rods: Closed cell or waterproof jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber meeting
requirements of ASTM C864, as required for compatibility with contact materials, no oil exudation, of
size and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturer for application, flexible and
resilient, with 5 to 10 pounds per square inch compression strength for 25 percent deflection. Provide
with feature to prevent rods from movement (walking) when compressed and released.
2.08 FABRICATION
A. Exposed Glass Edges: Edges of glass to be exposed in the completed work, not concealed in a glazing
AESI27210 GLAZING 08800 -12
18JAN08
•
channel or rabbet, shall be square with glass face. Edge corners at faces and exterior corners of glass
units shall be chamfered. Edges and comers shall be uniform.
A
D*
2.09 GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Types: Provide glass of types required as indicated in this Schedule, consisting of subsequent Articles.
B. Designations: Glass designations specified in this Schedule correspond to designations indicated by
Contract Documents.
2.10 BASE GLASS UNITS
A. Glass G -1A: Clear float glass, annealed minimum, 1/4 inch thick minimum.
B. Glass G -1 B: Patterned rolled patterned glass 100% obscuring, heat strengthened minimum, 1/4 inch
thick minimum.
C. Glass G -1C: Clear float glass, tempered, safety glass, 1/4 inch thick minimum.
D. Glass G -2: Spandrel Glass, heat strengthened minimum, % inch thick minimum, ceramic frit coated
E. Glass G -3: Clear wire glass, 1/2 inch square wire mesh, safety glass, 1/4 inch thick minimum, UL
Classified and Marked for fire resistance.
2.11 LAMINATED GLASS UNITS
A. Glass G -10: Laminated glass unit, clear, heat strengthened minimum, two glass plies, safetyglass,1/2
inch thick nominal, as follows:
1. Configuration:
a. Glass Plies: Each, Glass G -1 B.
b. Interlayer: Water clear PVB laminating film, 0.030 inch thick minimum.
2. Outdoor Aesthetic Effect: Clear appearance as acceptable to Architect.
2.12 INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Glass G -20: Insulating glass unit, clear, annealed minimum, two glass panes,1 inch thick nominal, as
follows:
1. Configuration:
a. Exterior Pane: Glass G -1A.
b. Space: 1/2 inch wide, filled with dehydrated air.
c. Interior Pane: Glass G -1 A.
2. Aesthetic Effect: Clear appearance.
3. Performance:
AESI 27210 GLAZING
18JAN08
08800 -13
a. Light Transmittance:
1) Visible: 79 percent.
2) Solar: 61 percent.
3) Ultraviolet: 46 percent.
b. Light Reflectance:
1) Visible Outdoors: 14 percent.
2) Visible Indoors: 14 percent.
3) Solar Outdoors: 11 percent.
c. U- Values (NFRC):
1) Winter Nighttime: 0.47 Btu/h - sq.ft: F.
2) Summer Daytime: 0.49 Btu/h - sq.ft: F.
d. Shading Coefficient: 0.81.
e. Relative Heat Gain: 169 Btu/h - sq.ft. -F.
f. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.70.
R1
B. Glass G -21: Insulating glass unit, clear, tempered, two glass panes, 1 inch thick nominal, as follows:
1. Configuration:
a. Exterior Pane: Glass G -1 C.
b. Space: 1/2 inch wide, filled with dehydrated air.
c. Interior Pane: Glass G -1 C.
2. Aesthetic Effect: Clear appearance.
3. Performance: As specified for Glass G -20.
C. Glass G -30: Insulating glass unit, Obscure panel, heat strengthened minimum, two glass panes, 1-1/4
inch thick nominal, as follows:
1. Configuration:
a. Exterior Pane: Glass G -1A.
b. Space: 1/2 inch wide, filled with dehydrated air.
c. Interior Pane: Glass G -1 B.
2. Aesthetic Effect: Translucent frost white appearance as acceptable to Architect.
AESI27210 GLAZING 08800 -14
18JAN08
r
3. Performance: Not less than specified for Glass G -20.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal
surfaces where elastomeric sealants are to be used.
3.03 GLAZING
A. General:
1. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, including requirements
specked in Part 2 of this Section and applicable reference specification sections, as indicated by
final reviewed submittals for work, and meeting instructions and recommendations of product
manufacturers. Consult with manufacturers for conditions not covered by printed instructions.
2. Schedule: Install glass units using glazing systems scheduled in Article - Glazing System Schedule,
of this Section.
3. Channel Dimensions: Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for
necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses,
with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by project conditions at time of installation.
4. Cutting Glass: Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade glass which is tinted, heat absorbing, coated, heat
strengthened, tempered, laminated or insulating, including glass which is heat treated as a result of
a fabrication process.
5. Edge Damage: Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect each
glass unit for edge damage immediately before installation. Remove from project and dispose of
glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and
impairs performance and appearance.
6. Primers: Apply primers to surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants.
7. Fire Resistant Glass: Meet requirements of NFPA 80 for installation of glass in fire -rated
construction.
8. Insulating Glass Units: Install insulating glass units meeting recommendations, guidelines, and
performance and quality assurance criteria of SIGMA, except for more stringent requirements of
Contract Documents, and except where instructions or technical representatives of framing
manufacturer, glass unit manufacturer and manufacturers of accessory glazing materials used in
AESI 27210 GLAZING 08800 -15
18JAN08
glazing directs otherwise.
9. Appearance:
a. General: Set glass units in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
b. Wire Glass: Install wire glass with wire pattern vertical and horizontal.
B. Setting Glass:
1. Setting Blocks: Install setting blocks or proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width
from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6 inches from corner, unless
otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use.
2. Spacers: Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face
clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets
or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of
spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness
slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
3. Edge Blocking: Provide edge blocking to meet requirements of referenced glazing standards,
except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.
C. Channel Glazing:
1. Glazing Sealants:
a. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back -up material, as instructed or recommended
by sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and
from adhering to joint back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for optimum
performance, unless otherwise required.
b. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
c. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install
pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and
moisture pockets, except where a sealant cap bead is required.
2. Glazing Tapes:
a. Use glazing tape as applicable for frame rabbet detail meeting instructions of tape manufacturer.
Frame rabbet section to receive tape must have a profile acceptable to tape manufacturer to
provide anchorage to ensure that tape will not walk -out when subjected to movement.
b. Bond ends of glazing tape together at corners so that tape will not pull away from corners and
result in voids or leaks in glazing system.
c. Install glazing tape to protrude slightly out of channel so as to eliminate dirt and moisture
pockets, except when sealant cap bead is required position tape to provide a 3/16 inch deep
channel for sealant cap bead.
3. Compression Glazing Gaskets:
K
AESI27210 GLAZING 08800 -16
18JAN08
• •
a. When required gaskets shall be single, continuous joint free units with molded corners for each
frame application.
b. Size, cut and install gaskets in manner instructed or recommended by gasket manufacturer to
prevent pull away at corners; seal corner joints with sealant instructed or recommended by
gasket manufacturer.
1) When gasket is a separate single strip for each bite surface, cut gasket approximately 1/16
inch per 3 feet longer than the respective channel into which gasket will be inserted. Cut
ends of gasket at about a 45 degree angle so that top is longer than base.
2) In setting gaskets into the channel between the glass and frame stops, the horizontal strips
(head and sill) to be set first, then the vertical (jamb) strips.
3) To avoid stretching gaskets, first place gaskets into the corners and then into center of the
channel. Push the remaining gasket into the channel and finish with a roller. Roll from the
center toward one corner. Return to the center and roll toward the opposite comer.
c. Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not walk out
when installation is subjected to movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, including
embedment of gasket tail in sealant heel bead. Install gasket in manner so not to place bending
stress on the glass, causing breakage.
d. Install gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture
pockets.
4. Cleaning and Trimming: Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or
frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations.
3.04 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If,
despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
immediately by method instructed or recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent
intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build -up of dirt, scum, alkali
deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove bymethod
instructed or recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways
during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to
establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method instructed or
recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.05 GLAZING SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide glazing systems for installing glass as indicated in this Schedule.
AESI 27210 GLAZING 08800 -17
18JAN08
0
B. Metal Framing Systems: Glazing systems as required to meet single responsibility and performance
requirements specified for respective work and requirements of this Section. Provide following glazing
systems:
1. Channel Glazing - Exterior: Wet or dry channel glazing system. Provide silicone sealant cap bead
over any spacer shim, glazing tape or other like glazing rabbet material, inside and outside as
applicable.
2. Channel Glazing - Interior: Wet or dry glazing system. Provide silicone sealant cap bead over any
spacer shim, glazing tape or other like glazing rabbet material, both sides as applicable.
C. Miscellaneous Interior Glazing:
1. Channel Glazing - Standard Glazing Stop:
a. Fixed Stop Side: Continuous spacer shim and silicone sealant cap bead.
b. Removable Stop Side: Continuous compressible filler rod and silicone sealant cap bead.
END OF SECTION
Fj
AESI27210 GLAZING 08800 -18
18JAN08
•
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL, INC. SECTION 08830
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS GLASS MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and
Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Glass mirrors are indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary and
incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
C. Schedule: Required types of glass mirrors include, but are not limited to, types specified and scheduled
in Part 2 of this Section.
D. Related Work:
1. Glass and glazing.
2. Framed mirrors associated with toilet room accessories.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. ANSI Z97.1 - Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Materials Used in
Buildings.
2. CPSC 16CFR1201 - Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials.
3. FGMA - Glazing Manual.
4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code (Codes for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures).
B. Performance Requirements:
1. General: Work shall meet performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents, including
requirements specked in this Paragraph and in other parts of this Section.
2. Safety Glass:
a. Where safety glass mirror is indicated by Contract Documents or required by authorities bearing
on performance of the Work, provide type of products indicated which meet requirements of
ANSI Z97.1 and 16CFR1201, Category II Materials.
b. Provide safety glass mirrors
Certification Council (SGCC)
jurisdiction.
permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing
or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having
AESI 27210 GLASS MIRRORS 08830 -1
18JAN08
AWN
3. Compatibility: Accessory materials, including variations and modifications, in each installation
system shall be proven by test to be completely compatible with each other and with surfaces
contacted in installation.
4. Installation: Glass mirror installation system shall provide sufficient support for required loadings,
including but not limited to, minimum positive and negative loads, dead and live loads, deflections,
temperature changes and impact loading.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualifications: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide products
indicated under same category produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and
condition of glass required and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type
and class required.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall specialize in performing work of this Section and have 5 years
minimum documented experience in detailing, fabrication, installation and maintenance of type and
quality required for work and shall be acceptable to glass mirror manufacturer. Upon request, provide
proof of qualifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, and installation, cleaning and protection
instructions of manufacturer for each product. Include published data, certified compliance report or
certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating each proposed product meets
requirements of Contract Documents and is proven compatible by testing with adjacent products and
surfaces identical to products and surfaces to be used in the work.
B. Samples: Submit representative samples of each product. Samples will be reviewed only for visual
characteristics and quality and severity of surface distortions.
1. Glass Mirrors: Submit 12 inch square samples of each type glass mirror required, including
required edge treatment on two adjoining edges of sample.
2. Accessories: Submit 12 inch long sample of each type accessory material, of each color required,
to be exposed to view in the completed work.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. General: Protect glass mirrors and accessories during shipping, delivery, storage and handling meeting
instructions of manufacturer and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass
and accessories from effects of moisture, including surface condensation, of temperature changes, of
direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. Prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and
abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranty work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, exc;ept warranty shall include
additional requirements specked in this Article.
B. Coverage: Defective materials and workmanship shall include glass mirrors which develop silvering
defects, including discoloration, clouding, reduction of image visibility, spots or similar physical orvisual
defects.
AESI 27210 GLASS MIRRORS 08830 -2
18JAN08
• •
C. Signatures: Warranty shall be signed by Contractor, installer and manufacturer.
16 D. Time Period: Extend warranty time period to 5 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Materials: Material requirements specified are minimum requirements. Provide each material required
for the work as recommended for application by glass mirror manufacturer and meeting requirements
specified in this Section, including permanence required for warranty.
2.02 GLASS MIRRORS
A. Primary Glass:
1. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I (transparent, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q2 (mirror
quality) minimum, strength type and thickness as scheduled in Article - Glass Mirror Schedule, at
end of Part 2 of this Section.
B. Mirror Manufacture:
1. Glass: Glass type, color and thickness as scheduled in Article - Glass Mirror Schedule, at end of
Part 2 of this Section.
2. Sizing: Cut and fabricate glass units to final sizes and complete edge treatment and other
fabrication work before silvering.
3. Exposed Glass Edges: Edges of glass mirror units to be exposed in the completed work shall be
square with glass face and edge comers slightly chamfered at 45 degrees. Grind edges and
chamfer comers to provide a polished finish. Appearance of edges and chamfered comers shall be
uniform.
4. Concealed Glass Edges: Edges of glass mirror units to be concealed in the completed work shall
be square with glass face. Grind edges as required for performance and permanence.
Appearance of edges shall be uniform.
5. Back Surface Coatings:
a. General: Provide back surface of glass mirror with a full chemically deposited silver coating,
covered by a protective electrolytically plated copper protective coating of 0.0002 inch minimum
thickness by galvanic process, and non - metallic protective coating meeting requirements of FS
DD -M -411.
b. Edge Seal: Seal edges of back surface coatings to prevent deterioration and damage of
coatings.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Substrate Sealer: Paint or sealer type material that will seal surface of substrate over which glass
mirror is to be installed for proper application, bond and longevity of mirror mastic.
AESI 27210 GLASS MIRRORS 08830 -3
18JAN08
t� O
B. Metal Supports and Trims:
1. Supports and Trims: Devices of channel or angle like profile as required for support, trim and
protection of mirror with concealed mechanical fastenings for anchorage to supporting construction.
Depth of device shall be applicable for thickness of glass mirror and required air space behind
mirror. Exposed flange shall be of minimum dimension. Device shall be AISI Type 304 stainless
steel with Number 4 (satin) finish on exposed surfaces.
2. Blind Clips: System of metal key slots with concealed mechanical fastenings for anchorage to
supporting construction and matting clip anchors for attachment to back of glass mirror.
3. Fastener: Mechanical type suitable for anchoring metal supports and trims to supporting
construction, and sufficient in size, strength and quantity to support loads.
C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone extrusions with durometer of 80 to 90 Shore A hardness
and of solid profile. Length of each setting block shall be 0.1 inch minimum for each square foot of
glass mirror area, but not less than 4 inches, and minimum width shall correspond with glass mirror
thickness.
D. Spacers Shims: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone extrusions with durometer of 40 to 60 Shore A hardness
and of solid profile. Spacer shim profile and size shall be as required for application.
E. Mirror Mastic: Adhesive setting compound manufactured specifically for setting mirrors by spot
application method with 25 percent mastic coverage and 1/8 to 1/2 inch thickness of mastic setting bed,
with glass mirror supported at bottom edge. Shear strength of mastic shall be 400 pounds minimum.
2.04 GLASS MIRROR SCHEDULE
A. General:
1. Types: Provide glass mirror units of types required as in this Schedule.
2. Designations: Glass mirror designations indicated in this Schedule correspond to designations
indicated by Contract Documents. Provide glass mirror types and accessories as required for
respective application.
B. Glass Mirror GM -1: Laminated glass mirror unit, clear, two glass plies, safety glass, 1/4 inch thick
nominal, as follows:
1. Configuration:
a. Glass Plies: Each, clear float glass, annealed minimum, 1/8 inch minimum thickness glass.
b. Interlayer: PVB laminating film, 0.030 inch thick minimum.
2. Performance: Meet requirements of ASTM C1172, Kind LM; ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201,
Category II materials.
AESI 27210 GLASS MIRRORS 08830 -4
18JAN08
0 0
PART 3 - EXECUTION
0 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas, substrates and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance
with requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work
are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
B. Substrate: Substrate surfaces shall be smooth, firm, dry, free from projections and sealed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final reviewed
submittals for work, and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers. Consult
with manufacturers for conditions not covered by printed instructions.
B. Substrates: Seal substrates over which glass mirror is to be installed with substrate sealer applied
meeting instructions of manufacturer.
C. Support Devices:
1. General: Install support devices for glass mirrors with concealed mechanical fasteners anchored to
supporting construction.
2. Blind Clips: Provide blind clip near top of glass mirror units when required to retain glass mirror in
position while mirror mastic achieves cure. Secure key slot anchors to supporting construction.
Provide two clip anchors for each glass mirror unit. Locate each clip 2 to 6 inches, depending on
glass mirror size, from each corner. Position mirror in place with clip anchors inserted into key slot
anchor.
D. Layout:
1. Edge Damage: Inspect each unit of glass mirror immediately before installation, and discard units
which have edge damage or face imperfections.
2. Arrangements: Arrange glass mirror units to provide a uniform and symmetrical arrangement.
Width of joints between adjacent glass mirror units shall be minimal.
3. Appearance: Unify appearance of each series of glass mirror units by setting each unit to match
others as nearly as possible. Inspect each glass mirror unit and set with pattern, draw and bow
oriented in same direction as other units.
4. Alignment: Install glass mirrors true to line, and plumb and level. Face surfaces of adjacent glass
mirror units shall be in flush alignment.
5. Back Space: Provide open space of 1/8 inch minimum width between glass mirror back and
substrate over 75 percent of glass mirror area where no mirror mastic exists. Provide space and
perform work in a manner that allows for vertical air movement and permits escape of any
condensation. Do not seal off space at edges of glass mirror.
AESI 27210 GLASS MIRRORS 08830 -5
18JAN08
E. Setting Mirror Units:
1. Setting Blocks: Where glass mirror is supported along bottom edge by a support device and if .,
required by glass mirror manufacturers, provide setting blocks located one - quarter of mirror width
from each comer.
2. Spaces: Provide spacers between back of glass mirror and substrate as necessary to maintain
back space and alignment between mirror units.
3. Mirror Mastic: Apply mirror mastic to cover 25 percent of back of glass mirror and in a manner that
provides and maintains back space.
4. Settings: Set glass mirror on supports and press against substrate to ensure bond of adhesive.
Provide blind clips as required by installation condition.
END OF SECTION
IE
AESI 27210 GLASS MIRRORS 08830 -6
18JAN08
� ]l
•
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL, INC.
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
0
SECTION 08900
EXTERIOR WALL MOCKUP AND TESTING
A. Description: Exterior wall is indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary and
incidental to completion and performance of the work.
B. Included: Exterior wall includes, but is not limited to, following:
1. Exterior wall mock -up for testing.
2. Visual mock -ups as required.
3. Exterior wall framing and panels, excluding structural work indicated on Structural Drawings.
4. Stone Veneer work.
5. Operable sash.
A
6. Spandrel panels and column cladding.
7. Panels, closures, covers, fascia, trim and like items as required for work to meet design criteria
requirements and to provide weathertight exterior wall.
8. Entrance and storefront construction, including following:
a. Manual sliding doors at exterior.
b. Automatic doors at exterior and vestibules.
c. Receive and install door hardware associated with doors included in work, except lockset
cylinders.
9. Louvers and grilles.
10. Anchors, inserts, bearings, expansion devices and fasteners.
11. Thermal insulation and vapor barriers.
12. Firestopping within exterior wall construction as required, and between exterior wall and adjacent
building construction.
13. Flashing, weeps and vents.
14. Joint fillers, gaskets and sealants.
15. Glass and glazing.
16. Finish coatings.
17. Field quality control testing on portions of exterior wall work, outside and inside.
AESI 27210
18JAN08
EXTERIOR WALL
9*011I3
L 77
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the work:
1. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Metal Curtain Walls for Water Penetration Using Dynamic
Pressure.
2. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water Leakage (hose test).
3. AAMA 503 - Field Check of Water Penetration Through Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors by Uniform Air Pressure Difference.
4. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne -Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions.
5. ASTM E283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors.
6. ASTM E330 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
7. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
F .
8. ASTM E783 -Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors.
B. Conflicts: In case of conflict with other exterior wall requirements of Contract Documents, most
stringent requirement shall govern.
C. Design Basis:
General: Descriptions and requirements indicated by Contract Documents establish basic
arrangements, visual concepts, dimensions and modules of units, profiles and sightliness of
members, performance, function, operation and like requirements. Within these limitations, work
shall meet arrangements, visual concepts, design criteria and like requirements indicated by
Contract Documents, include components not indicated but necessary for performance, function
and operation and to be a complete system. Perform modifications only as necessary to meet
requirements of Contract Documents and to coordinate the work, subject to acceptance by
Architect. Maintain general design concept without altering profiles and alignments. Variations in
details and materials shall not adversely affect appearance, durability or strength. Provide
complete drawings and data of proposed modifications.
2. Qualification: Contract Documents are intended to cover complete work and to outline products
required, but not to cover details of design and construction. Such details shall be responsibility of
single responsibility exterior wall firm. Contract Documents do not invent or develop any part of
work, but have made only selections of capacities, speeds, control systems, materials and other
like characteristics from choices made available by manufacturer.
3. Certification: Work shall be designed, certified, reviewed and inspected byengineerof Contractor.
D. Design Criteria - General: Work shall meet and perform to design criteria and like requirements
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR WALL 08900 -2
18JAN08
0 •
indicated by Contract Documents.
40 E. Design Wind Pressure: Design, fabricate and install component parts so that the completed exterior
wall, including glass, shall withstand inward and outward pressure of 40 psf, but not less than indicated
in wind tunnel report.
F. Air Infiltration and Water Penetration: Design, fabricate and install exterior wall, including joints
between exterior wall and other work, to prevent leakage of air and water into the building under any
combination of the specked performance requirements when any type or amount of precipitation
occurs.
1. Air Infiltration - Fixed Wall: Leakage of air is defined as air infiltration at a rate exceeding 0.06 cfm
per square foot on a complete module or bay of the exterior wall. No air leakage shall occur
subjected to uniform static air pressure difference of 20 percent of design wind pressure, but not
less than 6.24 psf, when tested meeting requirements of ASTM E283.
2. Air Infiltration - Sliding Doors: Leakage of air is defined as air infiltration at a rate exceeding 0.30
cfm per square foot of door area. No air leakage shall occur when subject to uniform static air
pressure of 6.24 psf, when tested meeting requirement os ASTM E283.
3. Air Infiltration - Operable Sash: Leakage of air is defined as air infiltration at a rate exceeding 0.10
cfm per linear foot of crack. No air leakage shall occur when subjected to uniform static air
pressure difference of 20 percent of design wind pressure, but not less than 6.24 psf, when tested
meeting requirements of ASTM E283.
4. Water Penetration: Leakage of water is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water, other
than condensation, on any indoor part of exterior wall.
a. Fixed Wall - Static Pressure: No water leakage shall occur when subjected to uniform static
air pressure difference of 20 percent of design wind pressure, but not less than 12 psf, when
tested meeting requirements of ASTM E331.
b. Fixed Wall - Dynamic Pressure: No water leakage shall occur when subject to pressure of 20
percent design wind pressure, but not less than 12 psf, when tested meeting requirements of
AAMA 501.1.
c. Sliding Doors: No water leakage shall occur when subjected to uniform static air pressure of 8
psf when tested meeting requirements of ASTM E331.
d. Operable Sash: No water leakage shall occur when subjected to uniform static air pressure
difference of 20 percent of design wind pressure, but not less than 12 psf, when tested
meeting requirements of ASTM E331.
G. Deflections: Design, fabricate and installed exterior walls that each component will not exceed the
specified maximum deflections. Base calculations for deflections upon the combination of maximum
direct loadings, building deflections, thermal stresses and erection tolerances. Do not permit
permanent deflections in the exterior wall work.
H. Design Factor of Safety: Design, fabricate and install structural components of the exterior wall,
including framing members, glazing stops or gaskets, weldments, connections, adhesives and sealants
used as adhesives, with a factor of safety not less than 1.5, such that failure of any structural
component shall not occur at less than 1.5 times the maximum design wind pressure, except where
more stringent requirements are indicated by Contract Documents. Failure is defined as breakage,
component disengagement or permanent distortion.
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR WALL 08900 -3
18JAN08
ti 4
I. Design Temperature: Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed design temperature
of 70 degrees Fahrenheit. Fabrication and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient
temperature range at the time of the respective operations.
Exterior Wall Movements: Exterior wall work shall accommodate following, without damage,
overstressing, buckling, deterioration, opening up of joints, failure of joint seals, reduction of
performance and other detrimental effects to system, components and seals:
1. Dead load and live load deflections of structural support framing and related structural elements.
Architect will furnish specific data on anticipated movements as requested by Contractor.
2. Dynamic loadings and release of loads.
3. Movement within system.
4. Movement between system and framing components.
K. Building Movement: Design, fabricate and install exterior wall to withstand building movements,
including thermal movements, loading deflections, shrinkage, creep and similar movements. Architect
will furnish specific data on anticipated building movements as may be requested by Contractor.
L. Thermal Movement: Design, fabricate and install exterior wall to withstand expansion and contraction
forces resulting from exterior wall material surface temperature range of 180 degrees Fahrenheit
minimum. Include actual surface temperature of components due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime heat loss.
M. Condensation Control: Design, fabricate and install the exterior wall to prevent condensation on the
indoor face with the building heating and ventilating system in normal operation under the following
conditions. Architect will furnish specific heating and ventilating data as may be requested by the
Contractor. Condensation is defined as visible water, ice or frost on any area of any module of the
exterior wall, or the accumulation of uncontrolled condensation flowing from the exterior wall at any
location.
1. Outdoor: Ambient temperature of -10 degrees Fahrenheit, 15 mph wind.
2. Indoor: Ambient temperature of 75EF, relative humidity of 30 percent.
N. Condensation Resistance: Condensation resistance factor shall be 60 minimum, excluding required
glass units, when tested meeting requirements of AAMA 1502.7.
O. Sound Transmission Criteria: Design, fabricate, and install the exterior wall to achieve a sound
transmission class of STC -55 when tested in accordance with ASTM E90.
P. Tolerances: Fabrication and erection tolerances are specified in the Specification Sections as
applicable to the various exterior wall components.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's Quality Assurance Responsibilities: Contractor is solely responsible for quality control of
the Work.
B. Single Responsibility: Contract the exterior wall work to a single firm so as to establish undivided
responsibility for the entire exterior wall work.
C. Product Qualifications: Provide products indicated under same category produced by one
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR WALL 08900 -4
18JAN08
•
CJ
manufacturer.
D. Installer Qualifications: Provide one installer for each category of exterior wall work with 5 years
minimum certifiable experience in design, engineering, detailing, fabrication, installation and
maintenance of extent, type and quality of work required for respective category of exterior wall work.
E. Engineer of Contractor Qualifications: Professional engineer of Contractor licensed to practice in
jurisdiction where the work is located and experienced in providing engineering services that have
resulted in successful installation and performance of work similar in extent, design and products to
that required for the work.
F. Welding Qualifications:
1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators meeting requirements of AWS D1.1 and AWS -
Standard Qualification Procedure.
2. Each welder to be employed on work shall be currently certified as satisfactorily passing AWS
qualification tests for welding process required for work. If recertification of welder is required,
retesting shall be responsibility of Contractor.
G. Mock -Up of Exterior Wall for Testing: Build a mock -up to comply with not less than the minimum
requirements of ASTM E331. Use the same materials, finishes, details, methods and anchorage
system proposed for the exterior wall. Simulate actual construction conditions as accurately as
possible in every way. Provide extra materials
as may be required to replace materials which fail during tests, except intentional failure tests beyond
specked performance requirements. Cut glass used in the mock -up to the minimum tolerances
expected in the final exterior wall installation.
1. Corrective Measures: Correct deficiencies in the mock -up observed during testing or indicated by
the test report, keep a written record of the deficiencies found and the corrections made, and
repeat tests as maybe required to show compliance with the performance standards. Incorporate
corrective measures into the final exterior wall assembly after review by the Architect.
2. Post -Test Examination of Mock -Up: After completion of the exterior wall mock -up test,
disassemble the mock -up to verify that it was assembled in accordance with the actioned shop
drawings and agreed revisions. Any portion of the mock -up which deviates from the shop drawings
or agreed revisions shall be subject to retesting.
H. Visual Mock -Up: Provide mock -up of exterior wall construction. Mock -up shall be representative of the
finished work in every respect. Replace unsatisfactory work as directed. Erect where directed to
simulate final wall condition, and indicating joint conditions with sealant, use of spacers, shims
anchorage, supports and other features as will be used in the final work. Mock -up assembly will be
used as a standard for judging acceptability of work on project.
Field Samples: Provide sample installations for each major type of work to be incorporated in exterior
wall construction. Install samples at locations designated by Architect. Samples shall represent the
primary types of materials and construction systems to be encountered in exterior wall work.
Installation shall comply with manufacturer's recommendations and actual proposed methods.
Schedule the installations, with allowance for sufficient sealant curing time, so that samples may be
examined and necessary adjustments made at least 1 week prior to date scheduled for commencing
installation of the work. Visually examine the samples for general workmanship and appearance.
J. Regulatory Requirements: Meet requirements of codes of regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the work. Obtain necessary approvals from all such authorities.
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR WALL 08900 -5
18JAN08
1.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner's Testing Laboratory: The Owner will employ, at his own expense, a Testing Laboratory to
perform the following tests on the exterior wall mock -up and submit reports. The Testing Laboratory
shall be responsible for conducting and interpreting the tests, shall state in each report whether or not
the test specimens conform to requirements of the Contract Documents, and shall specifically note
deviations therefrom.
1. Outline of Mock -Up Test Procedures: Testing Laboratory shall finish a detailed outline of each test
procedure required by the Specification.
2. Reports of Exterior Wall Mock -Up Tests: Testing laboratory shall furnish copies of certified test
reports, prepared for each specified test of the mock -up, showing compliance with performance
requirements in accordance with reporting procedure described in the cited reference standards.
Mock -up, and testing and inspection shall be completely documented with 35mm photographs.
B. Test Pressure Values: Positive and negative design wind pressure values used in tests shall be
greatest positive and negative design wind pressure value required at any location of exterior wall.
C. Preliminary Exterior Wall Test: Prior to notifying the Architect of the readiness of the mock -up for final
testing, conduct a static pressure test at 50 percent of the maximum design wind pressure and follow
with a test for water penetration at 50 percent of the pressure specified under final tests, but do not
exceed the specified pressures. Correct deficiencies encountered. Keep a written record of the
deficiencies found and the corrections made.
D. Sequence of Exterior Wall Mock -Up Testing: Make the following tests of the mock -up in accordance
with the cited standards, except as herein modified, in the order listed and in accordance with the
specked performance criteria.
1. Test for air infiltration.
2. Test for water penetration at static pressure.
3. Test for water penetration at dynamic pressure.
4. Test for structural performance to full design wind pressure, ASTM E330.
5. Repeat Test 1 for air infiltration, Test 2 for water penetration at static pressure and Test 3 for water
penetration at dynamic pressure. If mock -up fails, make corrections and re -test commencing with
Test 4 for structural performance.
6. Cycled temperature procedure.
7. Repeat Test 1 for air infiltration, Test 2 for water penetration at static pressure and Test 3 for water
penetration at dynamic pressure, immediately after cycled temperature procedure. If mock -up
fails, make corrections and re -test commencing with cycled temperature procedure.
8. Repeat Test 4 structural performance to 1.5 times design wind pressure.
9. Test for sound transmission.
10. Seismic racking test.
E. Air Infiltration Tests: ASTM E283. Conduct at 12.00 psf.
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR WALL 08900 -6
18JAN08
• 0
F. Water Penetration Tests, Static Pressure: ASTM E331. Conduct tests at 12 psf loading. Maintain test
pressure for the full duration of one 15 minute cycle.
G. Water Penetration Test, Dynamic Pressure: AAMA 501.1, except conduct test at same loading
required for static pressure tests.
H. Structural Performance Test: ASTM E330, Procedure A, except conduct tests up to 1.5 times the
maximum design wind pressure for both positive (inward - acting) and negative (outward - acting) uniform
loading. Record the pressure and deflections at increments of
0.5, 1.0 and 1.5 times the design pressure.
1. Take deflection readings at end connections and midspan of main framing members, at
intersections of framing members, and at midspan of glass holding members, glass and panels.
Take readings for both positive and negative loading.
2. If failure occurs through glass breakage prior to achieving 1.5 times the maximum design pressure,
replace glass and repeat test. Provide sufficient stock of replacement glass at the test site to
complete the tests without undue delay.
3. Two successive failures of the same light or panel, not otherwise attributable to inherent glass
defects, will be considered unacceptable. Further tests shall be suspended until deficiencies are
corrected, which may include increasing the stiffness of glass holding members and adjustment of
the glazing details.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Combined Submittals for Exterior Wall: Furnish the submittals which are required by other Sections of
the Specification for every component to be combined in the exteriorwall system. Assemble submittals
of the component parts and prepare coordination details and erection diagrams for the entire exterior
wall system. Show typical details of all conditions for every member, joint anchorage and glazing
system. Show in the submittals that the exterior wall system has received the prior approval of the
Contractor, the single firm awarded the exterior wall work, and the manufacturer or fabricator of each
principal component.
B. Shop Drawings of Test Mock -Up: Submit for Architect's action. Furnish shop drawings of exteriorwall
mock -up showing details of the test specimen and locations of instrumentation. Shop drawings for
work shall be certified and sealed by engineer of Contractor who performed design work covered by
content of shop drawings, stating work meets requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Structural Calculations for Test Mock -Up: Submit for Architect's information. Furnish engineering
calculations to show that maximum stresses and deflections do not exceed specified performance
requirements under full design loading. Calculations shall be prepared, certified and sealed by
engineer of Contractor who performed design work.
D. Record Drawings of Test Mock -Up: Submit for Architect's information. Furnish drawings of the test
mock -up with actual dimensions and thickness of component parts. Include actual size of glass,
measured to 1/32" (1 mm) for height and width, and measured to 0.001" (0.025 mm) for thickness.
Indicate the modifications which were made to mock -up in order to successfully pass the tests.
E. Manufacturer Review Statement: Submit for Architect's information. Furnish statement in form
stipulated by Architect, signed by the Contractor and exterior wall Installer, stating that the Architect's
Drawings and Specifications, as well as the shop drawings and product data and other required
submittals, have been reviewed with qualified representatives of the materials manufacturers, and that
they are in agreement that the selected materials and systems are proper and adequate for the
application indicated by Contract Documents, including compatibility with adjacent systems and
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR WALL 08900 -7
18JAN08
O �
materials.
F. Quality Control Testing and Inspection Reports: Submit for Architect's information.
1. Inspection of bolted and welded connections.
2. Pressure chamber air and water tests.
3. Water hose tests.
G. Statement of Application: Submit for Owner's documentation. In addition to the individual statements
required for each major component of exterior wall, furnish a statement in form stipulated byArchitect,
signed by the Contractor and exterior wall Installer, stating that the Work was provided in compliance
with the Contract Documents and that the installation was proper for the conditions of application and
use.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. General: Deliver fabricated units and component parts of exterior wall to project site completely
identified in accordance with erection diagrams prepared by the single firm exterior wall work installer.
Store materials in dry location off ground meeting instructions and recommendations of manufacturer,
properly protected from weather and construction activities.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the project site by accurate field
measurements so that exterior wall work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the
structure. Tolerances for exterior wall are specified in other Sections. Notify Contractor in writing, of
dimensions found to be different than shown, including specified tolerances. Use Contractor's bench
marks as basis of measurements.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Manuals: Submit for Owner's documentation. Furnish complete manuals describing the
materials, devices and procedures to be followed in cleaning and maintaining the Work. Include
manufacturers' brochures and parts lists describing the actual materials used in the Work, including
metal allows, finishes, glass, sealants, gaskets and other major components. Assemble manuals for
component parts into single binders identified for each system.
B. Maintenance Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel who will be responsible for exteriorwashing after
the time of final acceptance. Demonstrate and train Owner's personnel, for a period of not less than 2
working days, in the proper methods of cleaning and maintaining the entire exterior wall.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranty work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except warranty shall
include additional requirements specked in this Article.
B. Exterior Wall Warranty: Submit for Owner's documentation. In addition to the individual warranties
required for each major component of exterior wall, furnish 20 year written warranty in form stipulated
by architect, signed by the Contractor and exterior wall installer, agreeing to repair or replace work
which has failed as a result of defects in materials or workmanship. Upon notification of such defects,
within the warranty period, make necessary repairs or replacement at the convenience of the Owner.
Defective materials and workmanship is hereby defined to include evidence of early deterioration,
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR WALL 08900 -8
18JAN08
• 0
weathering or aging of the work, uncontrolled water penetration or air infiltration, glass breakage,
deterioration of finishes, failure of operating parts to function properly, and other evidence of
deterioration or failure of the work to comply with performance or other requirements.
1. Warranty shall not include damage caused by vandalism and material conditions exceeding design
criteria and performance requirements. However, warranty does include failures or defects for
which causes cannot be determined.
2. Warranty shall include corrections of work found to be defective or non - conforming to Contract
Documents, including removal and replacement of other materials and work covering exteriorwall
work to extent required to repair or replace exterior wall work.
3. Warranty shall be at no cost limitation and at no expense to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EXTERIOR WALL COMPONENTS
A. General: Exterior wall construction includes components as described in other applicable Sections of
Specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which exterior wall is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of exterior
wall are satisfactory. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final reviewed
submittals for work and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers. Consult
with manufacturers for conditions not covered by printed instructions.
B. Anchorage: Install inserts and anchor components to supporting construction, securely in place using
permanent mechanical attachment system which meets design criteria and performance requirements,
permit movements which are intended and necessary and permits adjustments to accommodate
construction tolerances and irregularities. Use non - staining and non - corrosive shims, anchors,
fasteners, spaces and fillers, as applicable. Lead, plastic and wood anchorage devices not permitted.
C. Location: Install components, including inserts and anchors, accurately in relation to final location of
exterior wall components.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection of Connections: Perform 100 percent visual inspection at bolted and welded
connections in the work. Examine the size, quality and placement of each connection to verify
installation in accordance with Contract Documents and final reviewed shop drawings.
B. Pressure Chamber Air and Water Tests: After completion of the installation and curing of sealants,
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR WALL
18JAN08 08900 -9
D O
and before installation of interior trim members and heating unit covers, test approximately 5 percent of
the total exterior wall area exposed on the indoor side at each floor level. Furnish a full report of the
testing procedures, results and revisions or corrective procedures that shall be followed as a result of
the testing. Use portable pressurized enclosure unit sealed against the exterior wall on the indoor side.
Provide test enclosure equivalent in size to mock -up, unless directed otherwise. Conduct tests in the
presence of the Architect, who will determine the actual percentage of wall area to be tested based
upon indication of leakage of lack thereof. Repair or replace any components, including joints and
sealants, which leak or are observed to be defective in any way, and retest as directed.
1. Air Infiltration: Test in accordance with ASTM E783, and conduct tests at 20 percent of design
wind pressure, but not less than 12 psf.
2. Water Penetration: Test in accordance with AAMA 501.3 and ASTM E331, and conduct tests at 20
percent of design wind pressure, but not less than 12 psf. Use suspended pipe grid with nozzles to
supply the required water flow to the exterior of the wall.
C. Water Hose Tests: After completion of the installation and curing of sealants, test for water leaks in
accordance with AAMA 501.2, except perform 1 test for every 15 percent of total wall area. Conduct
tests in the presence of the Architect.
3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. General: In addition to speck protection and cleaning methods required for each component part by
the respective Sections of the Specification, and recommended by the respective manufacturers,
maintain the exterior wall throughout the construction period in a clean and properly protected condition
so that it will be without any indication of use or damage at the time of acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
E
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR WALL 08900 -10
18JAN08
CJ
•
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
A. Description: Portland cement plaster is indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work
necessary and incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
B. Included: Portland cement plaster includes, but is not limited to, following:
1. Metal supports for suspended and furred ceilings.
2. Weather managed system for outdoor work, including protection and penetration flashing.
3. Metal lath.
4. Trim accessories installed prior to or concurrent with plaster.
5. Outdoor portland cement plaster.
6. Joint sealants.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job -Mix Portland Cement -Based Plasters.
2. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement- Based.Plaster.
3. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement -
Based Plaster.
4. CLPCA - Plaster and Drywall Systems Manual.
5. MUSFA 920 - Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring.
6. MUSFA -Technical Bulletin 101.
7. PCA - Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual.
B. Design Criteria:
1. General: Work shall meet or perform to design criteria and like requirements indicated by Contract
Documents, including requirements specified in this Paragraph and in other parts of this Section.
2. Metal Supports and Lathing: Size metal support and lathing components meeting requirements of
ASTM C1063, except as otherwise required.
3. Expansion Joints: Divide portland cement plaster work into areas of 1600 square feet maximum.
Completely separate metal support, lathing and plaster by slipjoints or, where acceptable back to
back beads.
a. Do not exceed 40 feet in either direction and a length to width ratio of 2.5 to 1 between expansion
joints.
b. Install expansion joints at following locations where:
1) Perimeter of wall, ceiling, facia, and soffit areas.
2) Ceiling framing or furring changes direction.
3) Expansion joint occurs in building structure.
10 AESI 27210 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
18JAN08
09220 -1
c. Joint width separations shall be 1/4 inch for indoor work and 3/8 inch for outdoor work, except as
otherwise required by thermal exposure range, building movement and other like conditions.
4. Control Joints: Divide areas bounded by expansion joints with control joints into 100 square foot
areas with length of 18' -0" maximum and length to width ratio of 2.5 to 1 maximum, and meet more
stringent requirements of ASTM C1063. Also, provide control joints at other locations as required to
control cracking of plaster.
C. Fire - Resistant Ratings: Where portland cement plaster systems with fire resistance ratings are required,
provide materials and installation identical to materials and installation of applicable assemblies tested
meeting requirements of ASTM E119 by fire testing agency acceptable to public authorities bearing on
performance of the work.
D. Allowable Tolerances: Completed portland cement plaster work shall be within following tolerances:
1. Flat Surfaces and Lines: Do not deviate more than 1/8 inch in 10' -0" from a true plane in finished
plaster surfaces for bow, warp, plumb or level, including surfaces to receive an applied finish, as
measured by a 10' -0" straightedge placed at any location on surface.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Responsibility: Work shall be performed by a single installer having undivided responsibility for
providing complete work and for performance, quality and appearance of Work.
B. Product Qualifications: Provide products indicated under same category produced by one manufacturer
for the work.
C. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall specialize in performing work of this Section and have 5 years
minimum documented experience in design, detailing, installation and maintenance of type and quality
required for work and shall be acceptable to primary plaster manufacturer. Upon request, provide proof
of qualifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data and installation instructions of manufacturer
for each product. Include published data, certified conformance report or certified laboratory test report
of manufacturer substantiating proposed products meet requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Shop Drawings:
General: Submit shop drawings for installation of work. Include details of walls, ceilings, openings,
perimeters, corners and unusual conditions. Include details of metal supports and lathing,
attachment to supporting structure, and layout locations of control and expansion joints, and
plastering accessories.
2. Reflected Ceilings and Soffits: Submit shop drawings to include following:
a. Locate metal edgings, cutout and mechanical and electrical work which will be exposed on
ceiling and which are to be coordinated with ceiling, including, but not limited to, sprinkler heads,
speakers, and framing for light fixtures, grilles, diffusers and like items.
b. Locate center lines and work points in each room or area for other trades to work from.
c. Spacing and fastening details of hangers and anchorage to supporting structures.
d. Splicing and attachment details for main and cross runners of suspension systems.
e. Splicing and attachment details for trims and moldings.
AESI 27210 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 -2
18JAN08
• •
f. Revise reflected ceiling plan as required when field conditions caused revised dimensions or
other locations of fixtures or other exposed equipment.
C. Samples: Submit units 12 inches square minimum of each type, color and texture portland cement
plaster required, indicating full range of variations expected.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, identify, store and protect portland cement plaster materials to meet requirements of
reference standards and instructions of manufacturer. Coordinate delivery of materials to minimize
storage periods at project site.
B. Delivery: Except for sand and water, deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles
bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer.
C. Storage: Store materials inside under cover and in manner to maintain materials dry, and protected
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic
and other causes.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Meet requirements of ASTM C926 and instructions and recommendations of portland cement
plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during and after application of plaster.
2. Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation and from flows of air, both natural and
artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and project conditions to prevent dryout
during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or
combinations of these, as required.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to properly dry spaces after plaster has cured.
C. Protection: Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other harmful
effects which might result from plastering.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. National Gypsum Company.
B. United States Gypsum Company.
2.02 MATERIALS - METAL FURRING AND LATH
A. General:
1. Recommendations: Provide type, weight, grade and finish of materials, and include for each system
clips, fasteners, ties, reinforcing, stiffeners, shoes, tracks, hangers, brackets, anchors, accessories
and trim as recommended by manufacturer for application, except as otherwise required.
2. Metal Thickness: Thickness, gage or weight of metal materials shall be thickness, gage or weight
of metal only; not including thickness or weight of coatings.
AESI 27210 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 -3
18JAN08
3. Metal Protective Coatings: Metal materials shall be corrosion inhibitive paint coated or zinc coated,
except metal materials associated with outdoor work, outdoor walls, vestibules, humid spaces and
like areas shall be hot -dip zinc coated meeting requirements of ASTM A563, Coating Designation
G60, for 18 gage and lighter formed steel products, and ASTM Al23, hot -dip zinc coated after
fabrication, for 16 gage and heavier products.
4. Metal - Outdoor Wall: Metal furring, lathing and accessories for outdoor wall plaster work shall be
fabricated from AISI Type 304 stainless steel minimum. Stainless steel thickness shall be equivalent
to base metal weight or thickness specified for respective non - stainless steel components.
5. Metal Materials: Steel products, except as otherwise required, meeting requirements of ASTM
C1063.
a. Framing and Furring Members: Rolled channels and formed sheet metal components.
b. Metal Lath: Expanded metal meeting requirements of ASTM C847.
c. Trim Accessories: Zinc alloy material, except as otherwise required.
d. Wire Ties: ASTM A641, soft temper steel wire.
B. Suspended and Furred Ceilings:
1. Hanger Anchorage Devices:
a. General: Anchorage devices applicable to required method of structural anchorage for ceiling
hangers and whose suitability for intended application has been proven through construction
practices or by certified test data, except as otherwise required.
b. Anchor Fasteners: Expansion, chemical cost -in -place and like anchor fasteners, fabricated from
corrosion resistant materials, with means for attaching hangers and capable of sustaining without
failure a load equal to 5 times load imposed by actual ceiling hanger, including items supported
by ceiling construction, as determined by testing, meeting requirements of ASTM E488
conducted by an independent testing agency.
c. Actuated Fasteners: Powder, pneumatic and like power activated fasteners, fabricated from
corrosion resistant materials, with means for attaching hangers, and capable of sustaining
without failure a load equal to 10 times load imposed by actual ceiling hanger, including items
supported by ceiling construction, as determined by testing, meeting requirements of ASTM
E1190 conducted by an independent testing agency.
2. Hangers: Steel wire, rod or flat type and of size to meet requirements of ASTM C1063.
3. Runner Channels: 1 -1/2 inches deep by 7/16 inch wide flanges; 0.475 pounds minimum per linear
foot base metal weight, cold- rolled, or 1.12 pounds minimum per linear foot base metal weight, hot -
rolled.
4. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep by 7116 inch wide flanges, 0.3 pounds minimum per linear foot,
base metal weight, cold- rolled.
C. Metal Lathing:
1. General: ASTM C1063, MUSFA - Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring, and MUSFA
Technical Bulletin 101, for selection of metal lath for each application.
2. Self- Furring Lath: Diamond mesh lath as specified with indentations to hold lath 1/4 inch minimum
from substrate and, when applicable, with 15 # asphalt impregnated felt sheathing attached to
backside of lath to prevent plaster from bonding to substrate.
AESI 27210 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 -4
18JAN08
•
D. Trim Accessories: Meet requirements of ASTM C1063 and Part 3 of this Section. Provide 26 gage
minimum base metal units of pattern and profile required and coordinate depths with thickness of
plaster required.
1. Drip Weep Screed: Profile designed for use at sill plate line or other horizontal line to form plaster
stop and prevent plaster contact with adjacent construction, with weep holes.
2. Metal Corner Reinforcement: banded large -mesh diamond metal lath specially formed to
reinforce external comers of portland cement plaster on outdoor exposures while allowing full
plaster encasement.
3. Metal Corner Beads: Small nose corner beads with expanded flanges of large -mesh diamond lath
to allow full encasement by plaster.
4. Casing Beads: Square -edged style, with expanded flanges and removable protective tape.
5. Control Joints: Folded nonperforated screen in M -shape configuration with expanded flanges.
6. Expansion Joints: Pair of casing beads back to back with back flanges formed to provide slip joint
action, metal strip behind anchored to only one side of joint, adjustable for joint widths from 1/8 to
5/8 inch, minimum 0.0217 inch thick base metal, 16.2 percent net open area.
7. Vented Expansion Joint: Continuous perforations for venting or pair of casing beads back to back
with back flanges formed to provide slip joint action, perforated metal strip behind anchored to only
one side of joint, adjustable for joint widths from 1/8 to 5/8 inch, minimum 0.0217 inch thick base
metal.
2.03 MATERIALS - PLASTER
A. General: Neat or ready -mixed materials meeting requirements of ASTM C926.
B. Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I.
C. Lime: Special finishing hydrated lime, ASTM C207, Type S.
D. Aggregate: Sand, ASTM C897.
E. Fiber: Glass or polypropylene fibers for use in portland cement plaster which is approximately 1/2 inch
long, alkaline resistant and free of contaminates.
F. Prepared Finish Coat:
1. General: Polymeric finish: Acrylic polymer -based finish, water based acrylic coating with integral
color and texture to match field samples.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Flashing: Meet requirements of Section 07620 - Flashings and Trim.
B. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet and Flashing:
1. Description: Self- adhering, cold- applied, flexible composite sheet of 0.040 inch minimum total
thickness, consisting of rubberized asphalt laminated to a high density cross laminated polyethylene
film, and release paper to be removed from rubberized asphalt to expose adhesive surface. Provide
AESI 27210 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 -5
18JAN08
primer when recommended by manufacturer.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. W. R. Grace & Co., Ice & Water Shield.
b. Polyken Technologies, Polyken 640 Underlayment Membrane.
c. Polyguard Products, Inc., Polyguard Deck Guard.
d. Protecto Wrap Co., Jiffy Seal Ice and Water Guard.
e. Royston Laboratories, Inc., Ice Guard Membrane No. 108 -AG.
2.05 PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Meet requirements of ASTM C926 and instructions of manufacturer.
1. Measurement: Accurately measure ingredients, including water, using measuring devices of known
volume. Do not use shovel or water buckets as measuring devices. Proportion successive batches
alike.
2. Mixing:
a. Mix materials for minimum of 2 minutes or until all ingredients present a uniform color in mixer.
Use minimum amount of water required to produce plaster of workable consistency.
b. Use mechanical mixing equipment, except small applications requiring less than one bag of
plastering materials may be hand mixed.
B. Base Coat Mixes:
1. General: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume per sum of cementitious
materials for aggregates shall meet following requirements for each method of application and
plaster base required. Adjust mix proportions within limits specified to attain workability.
2. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Meet
instructions of fiber manufacturer but do not exceed 1 percent of the volume of cementitious
materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability.
C. Three Coat Work Over Metal Lath:
1. Scratch and Brown Coats: ASTM C926, Plaster Mix C, except proportion of lime shall not exceed
1/4 by volume, each coat mixed with fiber.
2. Finish Coat: Prepared finish coat and mix meeting instructions of manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
AESI 27210 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 -6
18JAN08
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorage: Coordinate work with supporting structural work to ensure inserts and other
structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers in a manner that will
develop full strength of anchorage provisions and at spacings required to support ceiling.
B. Verification: Verify dimensions of in -place and subsequent construction. Installation of work under this
Section constitutes acceptances of existing conditions.
C. Conditions: Plastering work shall not be preformed unless proper environmental conditions, including
temperature and ventilation conditions, recommended by manufacturer are maintained in work area.
D. Protection: Protect work, including floors, wood, glass and metal work, during progress of plasterwork.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final reviewed
submittals for work, and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers.
B. Weather Protection and Flashing:
1. General: Applications shall meet instructions and recommendations of rubberized asphalt sheet
manufacturer. Substrates shall be clean, and primed when recommended by manufacturer.
2. Sheeting:
a. Over construction to which metal lath is to be applied, apply rubberized asphalt sheet to solid
surfaces with long dimension at right angles to supports and lap upper layer over lower layer 2
0
inches minimum and lap vertical joints 3 inches minimum.
b. Sheet shall overlap, cover and terminate on flange of drip weep screeds.
3. Flashing: Flash penetrations shall provide protection from water penetration meeting requirements
and recommendation of CLPCA - Plaster and Drywall Systems Manual.
3.04 INSTALLATION - METAL FURRING AND LATHING
A. General: Meet requirements of ASTM C1063, MUSFA - Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring,
and installation instructions and recommendations of manufacturer.
1. Supplementary Framing:
a. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for support of
fixtures, equipment, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work to meet requirements for support of
such items, details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to meet applicable published
recommendations of lathing and furring manufacturer or, if not available, of United States
Gypsum Company - Gypsum Construction Handbook.
b. Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings and
frames for other work as required. Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work
that is not required to be supported independently of metal furring and lathing system.
2. Isolation:
AESI 27210 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 -7
18JAN08
AMN
a. Where metal furring and lathing abuts building structure horizontally, and where partition orwall
work abuts overhead structure, isolate work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent
transfer of loading into work from building structure. Install slip or cushion type joints to absorb
deflections but maintain lateral support.
b. Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently, and do not bridge joints with
furring and lathing or accessories.
3. Wire Tying: Except as otherwise required:
a. Tie outdoor furring with 14 gage or double 16 gage wire, and be outdoor lath with 16 gage wire.
4. Splicing Members: Lap furring members 8 inches and runner channels 12 inches, and wire -tie near
each end of lap. Lap studs 12 inches and install screws in both flanges near each end of lap. Splice
plastering accessories by use of concealed splices, anchored to prevent offsets.
B. Suspended and Furred Ceilings:
1. General: Complete ceiling suspension system with all supported loads, such as light fixtures,
diffusers or like items associated with ceiling.
2. Supported Loads: Light fixtures, diffusers or like items associated with ceiling shall not be supported
from ceiling suspension system if weight of such items exceed capability of suspension system or if
tolerances of suspension system will be exceeded. In such cases, load shall be supported by
supplementary hangers or shall be independently supported.
3. Hangers:
a. Support hangers directly from building structural members. Do not support hangers from metal
deck, bracing; pipes, ducts, conduits and respective supports, and like items.
b. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers onlywhere
required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces bybracing, countersplaying or
other equally effective means.
c. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that interfere with location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent
devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
required performance limits.
d. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to anchorage
devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a mannerthatwill not
cause anchorage devices and fasteners to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion,
elevated temperatures or vibration.
e. Secure flat, angle, channel and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not
cause hanger to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, elevated temperatures or vibration.
f. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
g. Wire -tie hanger wires to main runners or supports and twist at least 3 times to develop full
strength of wire.
h. Wind Uplift: For suspended ceilings and soffits located outdoors or in vestibules separating
outdoors from indoors, meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Criteria.
i. Seismic Forces: Provide cross - bracing, vertical compression struts and additional framing to
resist seismic forces meeting requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Criteria.
AESI 27210 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 -8
18JAN08
4. Runner Channels:
a. Space runner channels at 3' -0" maximum centers and space hangers along channels at 4' -0"
maximum centers.
b. Level runner channels to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet.
C. Metal Lathing:
1. Space furring members at 16 inches maximum centers for 3.4 pound diamond mesh lath and at24
inches maximum centers for 3.4 pound rib lath, except as otherwise required.
2. Install metal lath by wire- tying, nailing or clipping in accordance with industry standards.
3. When furring members are not applicable for installation, use self - furring lath anchored directly to
supporting structure or structural substrate.
D. Trim Accessories:
1. General:
a. Anchor each flange of accessories at 8 inch maximum centers to plaster base.
b. Miter or cope accessory corners, and install with tight joints accurately aligned.
c. Set accessories plumb, level and true to line, within tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet.
2. Comer Beads: Install small nose metal corner beads at external corners.
3. Casing Beads: Install casing beads at term inations of plaster work, exoeptwhere plaster is indicated
to pass through other work and will be concealed by lapping work, and except where special
screens, bases or frames act as casing beads, including interior metal door frames.
a. For outdoor work, set casing beads 1/4 inch from abutting frames and other work for application
of sealant.
b. Where plaster abuts concrete, set casing beads 1/4 inch from concrete.
4. Expansion Joints:
a. Install expansion joints at required locations with required joint width separation.
b. Install prefabricated expansion joints of two piece design. Install 1/4 inch joint width for indoor
work and 3/8 inch for outdoor work.
5. Control Joints: Install control joints at required locations within areas bounded by expansion joints.
3.05 INSTALLATION - PLASTER
A. Preparations:
1. Examine surfaces which are to receive plaster, grounds, and other accessories which act as
grounds or screens, and remedy any conditions detrimental to proper completion of work.
2. Clean plaster bases and substrates to be plastered, removing loose materials, coatings and other
substances which might impair work.
B. General: Meet requirements of ASTM C926 and instructions of manufacturer.
C. Sequencing: Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work, so that neither
will be damaged by installation of other.
D. Application: Plaster flush with built -in metal items or accessories which act as plaster grounds. Where
AESI 27210 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 -9
18JAN08
C 4
plaster is not terminated at metal by casing beads, cut base -coat free from metal before plaster sets
and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
E. Coats and Thickness: Apply number of coats of plaster and thickness as required for application
condition, meeting requirements of ASTM C926, if not otherwise required for fire resistance ratings.
1. Three Coat Work Over Metal Lath:
a. Floating Brown Coat: When brown coat begins to stiffen but is still pliable, float the brown coat
using a wooden float to compact mortar. After floating give brown coat surface a light scratch
finish.
2. Finish Coat: Provide finish as follows:
a. Outdoor Wall Plaster: Two types, match Architect's sample.
b. Outdoor Ceiling and Soffit Plaster: Fine textured sand float dense finish.
F. Curing: Cure portland cement plaster by maintaining each coat in a moist condition meeting
requirements of ASTM C926, including recommendation for time between coats.
3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cutting and Patching:
1. Cut, patch, point -up and restore plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to repair
cracks, dents and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive
crazing and check cracking, dry-outs, efflorescence, sweat -outs and similar defects, including areas
of work which do not comply with specified tolerances, and where bond to substrate has failed.
2. Sand troweled finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and arrises.
B. Cleaning: Remove plaster from door frames, window and other surfaces. Repair floors, walls and other
surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION
P]
P1
AESI 27210 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 -10
18JAN08
n
U
•
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and
Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Gypsum board assemblies are indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work
necessary and incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
C. Included: Gypsum board assemblies include, but are not limited to, following:
1. Wall and ceiling finish with gypsum board or like materials manufactured for direct application of
decorative finishes, including a joint treatment finishing system and trim system.
2. Ceiling suspension systems.
3. Metal stud systems.
4. Metal furring.
5. Gypsum board.
6. Gypsum board liner or shaft wall systems.
7. Thermal insulation and sound attenuation blankets associated with gypsum board assemblies.
8. Trim accessories installed prior to or concurrent with gypsum board.
9. Board finishing.
A
D. Schedule: Required types and application of board products include, but are not limited to, materials
and application locations scheduled in Article - Board Schedule, at end of this Section.
E. Related Work:
•
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1. Rough carpentry.
2. Vapor retarders.
3. Air barriers.
4. Firestopping, including protection for outlets, switches and like devices.
5. Acoustical sealants other than specified in this Section.
6. Access doors.
7. Ventilation of enclosed spaces.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Tile: As defined in Section 09300 -Tile.
B. Paver Tile: As defined in Section 09300 -Tile.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
AESI 27210
18JAN08
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09250 -1
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. Gypsum Board Terminology: GA -505.
2. Steel Framing: GA -201 and ASTM C754 for installation of steel framing for gypsum board.
3. Gypsum Board: GA -216 and ASTM C840 for installation and finishing of gypsum board, and GA-
214 for levels of gypsum board finish.
4. Ceilings: CISCA - Ceiling Systems Handbook, for installation of gypsum board ceilings.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Loading: Provide gypsum board systems designed and tested by manufacturer to withstand a
uniform lateral load perpendicular to surface and allowable deflection as follows:
a. Indoor Stud Walls and Partitions -General: Uniform lateral load (air pressure) of 5 psf minimum
and allowable deflection of U240 maximum based on supported span of wall or partition and
stud type, size and spacing, except as otherwise indicated by Contract Documents.
b. Indoor Stud Walls and Partitions With Applied Finish Materials: Uniform lateral load (air
pressure) of 5 psf minimum and allowable deflection of U360 maximum based on supported
span of wall and framing type, size and spacing, except when to receive only paint or
wallcovering.
c. Indoor Stud Walls and Partitions - Portland Cement Board: Uniform lateral load (air pressure) of
5 psf minimum and allowable deflection of U360 maximum based on supported span of wall
and framing type, size and spacing.
d. Shaft Wall Systems: Uniform lateral load (air pressure) of 10 psf minimum and allowable
deflection of 0360 maximum based on supported span of wall and framing type, size and
spacing.
e. Indoor Ceilings: Uniform load of 5 psf minimum and allowable deflection of U360 maximum
based on supported span of ceiling and framing type, size and spacing.
f. Outdoor Nonbearing Wall Systems: Uniform load of 40 psf minimum and allowable deflection of
U360 at sided areas, U720 at areas with stone veneer, deflection maximum based on supported
span of wall framing type, size and spacing and to resist lateral load (air pressure) meeting
requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements.
g. Outdoor Suspended Soffits and Entrance Vestibule Ceilings: Uniform load of 20 psf minimum
and allowable deflection of U360 maximum based on supported span of soffit or ceiling and
framing type, size and spacing and to resist wind uplift force meeting requirements of Section
01415 - Performance Requirements.
2. Isolation: Isolate non -load bearing walls and partitions from transfer of structural loading from
building structural components, such as decks, railing and vertical structural elements, both
horizontally and vertically. Provide slip or cushion type joints of dimension and detail to obtain
support meeting performance loading requirements and to prevent building structure load transfer.
a. Isolate perimeter of board materials of non -load bearing walls and partitions at abutment with
building structural components. 13
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -2
18JAN08
b. Provide 1/4 inch minimum to 1/2 inch maximum gap, except provide 1/2 inch minimum gap at
ceiling runner between gypsum board and structure. Provide greater gap dimension as required
to prevent transfer of loads from building structure to gypsum board.
c. Finish edges of face layer with J -type casing bead. Seal space between casing bead and surface
with continuous uniform bead of acoustical sealant, except as otherwise required for fire rated
assemblies.
d. Attach gypsum board to studs 1/2 inch minimum below bottom edge of ceiling runner flange and
to first stud adjacent to vertical runner. Do not attach board to runners or in any manner which
creates structural transfer of load to wall.
C. Sound Transmission Class: Where gypsum board assemblies with sound transmission class (STC)
ratings are required, provide materials and construction identical with applicable assemblies which have
been evaluated meeting requirements of ASTM E90.
D. Fire Resistance Rating:
1. Where gypsum board assemblies are indicated for fire resistance ratings, including those required
to meet regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work, provide materials and
installations identical with applicable assemblies which have been evaluated meeting requirements
of ASTM E119 and listed by recognized authorities, including UL and FM.
2. Provide fire resistance rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File
Numbers in GA -600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual or to design designations in UL - Fire
Resistance Directory.
3. Sound Rated Assemblies: Provide sound transmission class (STC) rated assemblies that are
0 1
identical to assemblies whose STC ratings are determined when evaluated meeting requirements of
ASTM E90 and classified meeting requirements of ASTM E413 by a qualified independent testing
agency. A qualified independent testing agency is defined as an acoustical laboratory accredited by
NVLAP, NIST.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualification: Provide gypsum board products from a single manufacturer or from
manufacturers recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.
B. Pre - Installation Meeting: Contractor shall conduct a pre - installation meeting at project site prior to
delivery of products to review conditions associated with performing gypsum board work. Meeting shall
include review of construction conditions, interface construction conditions, environmental conditions
and coordination required for proper installation in areas to receive gypsum board. Meeting participants
shall include Architect, gypsum board manufacturer representative and installers of related work.
Proceed with gypsum board installation only when everyone concerned agrees required conditions can
be provided and maintained.
C. Allowable Tolerances: On face surfaces of gypsum board exposed to view in completed work, limit
variations from location and plumb, including warp and bow, to following:
1. For Levels 0 thru 3 Finishes:
a. General: Limit to 1/4 inch in 8 feet in all directions from required plane and not more than 1/16
inch per foot, and limit offsets between planes of adjacent board faces to 1/16 inch.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -3
18JAN08-
D D
b. Tile and Paver Tile Substrates: 1/8 inch in 8 feet in all directions from required plane and not
more than 1/16 inch per foot, and limit offsets between planes of adjacent board faces to 1/16
inch.
2. For Levels 4 and 5 Finishes: 1/8 inch in 8 feet in all directions from required plane and not more
than 1/16 inch per foot, and limit offsets between planes of adjacent board faces to 1/16 inch.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and installation
instructions of manufacturer for each gypsum board material. Include published data, certified
conformance report or certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating that each material
meets requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. General: Submit stamped and certified shop drawings showing wall, partition and ceiling layouts,
and details of perimeters, corners, openings and unusual conditions. Include details of attachment
to supporting structure, and layout locations of control joints, access panels, thermal insulation,
sound attenuation and accessories.
2. Reflected Ceilings: Submit reflected ceiling and soffit shop drawings to include following:
a. Locate metal edgings, cutouts and all mechanical and electrical work which will be exposed on
ceiling and which are to be coordinated with ceiling including, but not limited to, sprinkler heads,
speakers, and framing for light fixtures, grilles, diffusers and like items, and sound attenuation
panels where required.
b. Locate center lines and work points in each room or area for other trades to work from.
c. Spacing and fastening details of hangers and anchorage to supporting structures.
d. Splicing and attachment details for main and cross runners of suspension systems.
e. Splicing and attachment details for trims and moldings.
f. Revise reflected ceiling plan with acceptance of Architect as required when field conditions
caused revised dimensions or other locations of fixtures or other exposed equipment.
C. Engineering Calculations: Stamped and certified typical and project specific calculations verifying sizes,
weights and profiles are conformance with structural performance requirements.
1. Structural Engineer Qualifications: A structural engineer who is licensed in the State of Colorado,
and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of cold- formed metal framing that are
similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, identify, store and protect gypsum board system materials to meet requirements of
reference standards and instructions of manufacturer.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer.
C. Storage: Store materials inside under cover and in manner to maintain materials dry, and protected
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -4
18JAN08
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic
and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
D. Handling: Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Protect metal
comer beads and trim from being bent or damaged.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Meet requirements of referenced gypsum board application standards,
and instructions and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, for environmental conditions
before, during and after application of gypsum board.
B. Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 55 degrees Fahrenheit maintain
continuous, uniform, building working temperatures of 55 degrees Fahrenheit minimum for a period of
48 hours minimum prior to, during and following application of gypsum board and joint treatment
materials.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for drying of
joint treatment material immediately after its application. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent
too rapid drying.
D. Lighting: Work area shall be illuminated during installation at same level, or higher, as will be available
at final inspection.
E. Protection: Installer shall advise Contractor of required and recommended protection facilities and
procedures to prevent damage and deterioration of completed gypsum board work.
F. Sequencing:
1. General: Do not proceed with installation of board products until framing, bracing, blocking and
other supports for subsequently installed work have been installed.
2. Wall and Ceiling Sequence: Install board products for walls and ceilings in sequence as required
for type of framing construction:
a. Steel Wall, Partition and Ceiling Framing: Ceilings and then walls.
b. Steel Wall and Partition Framing, and Suspended Ceiling Framing: Walls and then ceilings.
c. Wood Wall, Partition and Ceiling Framing: Ceilings and then walls.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL SUPPORT MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Metal Thickness: Thickness, gage or weight of metal support material shall be actual thickness,
gage or weight of metal only; not including thickness or weight of protective coatings and shall be
based on performance thickness requirement, not minimum thickness criteria, indicated in ASTM
C645 and AISI - Specifications for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structure Members.
2. Metal Protective Coatings: Metal support materials shall be corrosion inhibitive paint coated or zinc
coated, except metal support materials associated with outdoor work, exterior walls, vestibules,
humid spaces and like areas shall be zinc coated, except as otherwise required.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -5
18JAN08
� 0
B. Wall and Partition Support Materials: To extent not otherwise required, meet requirements of GA -201
and ASTM C754, as applicable, for metal systems supporting gypsum board work.
1. Stud System:
a. Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of
studs, and for abutment of gypsum board at adjacent work. Runner width shall accommodate
depth of studs and metal thickness shall be not less than specked for studs. Flange width shall
accommodate deflection movement of structure, allowing partition and wall heads to compress
and rebound with movement of structure, while maintaining continuity of assembly.
b. Studs: Light gage screw type, C- shaped studs of 25 gage (0.0188 inch thick) minimum base
steel, except as otherwise required for application and recommended by manufacturer for
spacing and height involved or otherwise required for application, meeting requirements of ASTM
C645. Depth of studs shall be 3 -5/8 inches minimum, except as otherwise required.
c. Stiffeners: 3/4 inch cold rolled steel channels at 0.3 pounds per foot.
d. Accessories: Clips, shoes, ties, reinforcements, fasteners and other accessories as needed for a
complete stud system standard with stud manufacturer. Provide 16 gage minimum continuous
sheet reinforcement at wall mounted railings as determined by required reactions.
2. Furring - Hat - Shaped: Screw type, hat - shaped furring channels of 25 gage (0.0188 inch thick)
minimum base steel, except as otherwise required for application, meeting requirements of ASTM
C645. Where furring is applied vertically, provide special shaped units at external corners. Where
required to be resilient, provide special type designed to reduce sound transmission.
3. Furring - Z- Shaped: Screw type, Z- shaped furring channels of 24 gage (0.0239 inch thick) minimum
base steel, of depth required; designed for mechanical attachment of insulation boards or blankets
to monolithic concrete and masonry walls.
4. Furring Brackets: Serrated arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion resistant steel sheet
meeting requirements of ASTM C645, of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch minimum thickness,
designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring.
5. Shaft System Support Materials:
a. Metal Framing and Furring: ASTM A446, Coating Designation G60; except meet requirements
of ASTM C645 for 25 gage (0.0188 inch thick) base steel and heavier members.
b. Accessories: Provide standard accessories of manufacturer as required and necessary for a
complete support system.
6. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. The Clark Steel, Inc.
b. Dietrich Metal Framing.
c. Marino \WARE.
d. Other members of Steel Stud Manufacturer Association (SSMA).
C. Ceiling Support Materials: Size ceiling support components to meet requirements of ASTM C754,
except as otherwise required.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -6
18JAN08
f�
1. Main Runners: 1-1/2 inch steel channels, either cold rolled at 0.475 pounds per foot or hot rolled at
40 1.12 pounds per foot, minimum.
2. Furring - Hat - Shaped: Screw type, hat - shaped furring channels of 25 gage (0.0188 inch thick)
minimum base steel, meeting requirements of ASTM C645. Where required to be resilient, provide
special type designed to reduce sound transmission.
3. Furring - C- Shaped: Screw type, C- shaped studs of depth required and 25 gage (0.0188 inch thick)
minimum base steel, meeting requirements of ASTM C645.
4. Hanger Wire: Soft temper steel wire meeting requirements of ASTM A641, Class 1 Coating for
indoor locations and Class B Coating for outdoor locations, 8 gage, minimum.
5. Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel.
6. Angle Type Hangers: Formed angles 7/8"x 7/8"x 0.0635" thick minimum base steel, minimum size,
with bolted connections and 5/16 inch minimum diameter bolts.
7. Hanger Anchorages Devices:
a. General: Anchorage devices applicable to required method of structural anchorage for ceiling
hangers and whose suitability for intended application has been proven through construction
practices or by certified test data, except as otherwise required.
b. Anchor Fasteners: Expansion, chemical, cast -in -place and like anchor fasteners, fabricated from
corrosion resistant materials, with means for attaching hangers, and capable of sustaining
without failure a load equal to 5 times load imposed by actual ceiling hanger, including items
supported by ceiling construction, as determined when evaluated meeting requirements of
ASTM E488 conducted by an independent testing agency.
c. Actuated Fasteners: Powder, pneumatic and like power activated fasteners, fabricated from
corrosion resistant materials, with means for attaching hangers, and capable of sustaining
without failure a load equal to 10 times load imposed by actual ceiling hanger, including items
supported by ceiling construction, as determined when evaluated meeting requirements of
ASTM E1190 conducted by an independent testing agency.
8. Furring Anchorages: 16 gage minimum wire ties, wire type clips, bolts, nails or screws as
recommended by furring manufacturer and meeting requirements of ASTM C754.
9. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. The Clark Steel, Inc.
b. Dietrich Metal Framing.
c. Marino\WARE.
d. Other members of Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
D. Fasteners: Types, sizes and materials recommended by metal support manufacturer for application
and substrate, corrosion resistant coated. Fasteners shall withstand loading conditions without
exceeding allowable design stress of fasteners, framing and material of substrate in which fasteners are
attached.
it AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -7
18JAN08
2.02 BOARD PRODUCTS
A. Gypsum Board GBA - Paper Surfacing: J
1. Description: ASTM C1396, noncombustible gypsum core with paper surfacing on faces, as
applicable to type of gypsum board required for work and whichever is more stringent, for indoor
applications, including substrate for tile, paint finishes, wall coverings and like decoration, and
unfinished work.
a. Regular: Regular gypsum board, except as otherwise indicated by Contract Documents.
Manufacturer available thicknesses are 1/4 inch, 3/8 inch and 1/2 inch.
b. Fire Resistant - Type C: Gypsum board with fire resistive core containing additives to enhance
integrity of core under fire exposure with paper surfacing on faces meeting requirements for
Type X gypsum board where required to achieve fire resistance assembly ratings. Board shall
be UL Classified Product with UL Classification Marking. Manufacturer available thicknesses are
1/2 inch and 5/8 inch.
c. Thickness: 5/8 inch minimum, except as otherwise indicated by Contract Documents. Also, meet
thickness requirements of GA -216 and ASTM C840 for each application and support spacing.
Meet requirements for fire resistance assembly ratings.
d. Panel Size: 4 feet wide by maximum length available which will minimize quantity of end- to-end
joints in work.
e. Long Edge Profile: Standard taper plus special bevel or rounded edges designed to reduce
beading and ridging of joint treatment.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. G -P Gypsum Corporation.
1) Regular: ToughRock Gypsum Board.
2) Fire Resistant - Type C: ToughRock Fireguard C.
b. Lafarge North America, Inc.
1) Regular: Regular Drywall.
2) Fire Resistant - Type C: Firecheck Type C.
c. National Gypsum Company.
1) Regular: Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard.
2) Fire Resistant - Type C: Gold Bond Brand Fire - Shield C Wallboard.
3) Ceiling: High Strength Brand Ceiling Board.
d. United States Gypsum Company.
1) Regular: Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels.
2) Fire Resistant - Type C: Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels Firecode C Core.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -8
18JAN08
• 0
3) Ceiling: Sheetrock Brand Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board, Sag- Resistant.
1 0 B. Gypsum Board GB -2 -Paper Surfacing; Humidity and Mold Resistant:
Description: ASTM C1396, noncombustible, moisture and mold resistant gypsum core with heavy
duty paper surfacing on faces, as applicable to type of gypsum board required for work and
whichever is more stringent, for indoor applications, including substrate for tile, paint finishes, wall
coverings and like decoration, and unfinished work. Board shall be resistant to intermittent moisture
and humidity exposure, and growth of mold when evaluated meeting requirements of ASTM D3273,
Panel Score 8 average minimum.
a. Regular: Regular gypsum board, except as otherwise indicated by Contract Documents.
Manufacturer available thicknesses are 1/2 inch and 5/8 inch.
b. Fire Resistant - Type C: Gypsum board with fire resistive core containing additives to enhance
integrity of core under fire exposure with heavy duty paper surfacing on faces meeting
requirements for Type X gypsum board where required to achieve fire resistance assembly
ratings. Board shall be UL Classified Product with UL Classification Marking. Manufacturer
available thicknesses are 112 inch and 5/8 inch.
c. Thickness: 5/8 inch minimum, except as otherwise indicated by Contract Documents. Also, meet
thickness requirements of GA -216 and ASTM C840 for each application and support spacing.
Meet requirements for fire resistance assembly ratings.
d. Panel Size: 4 feet wide by maximum length available which will minimize quantity of end- to-end
joints in work.
e. Long Edge Profile: Standard taper plus special bevel or rounded edges designed to reduce
beading and ridging of joint treatment.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Lafarge North America, Inc.
1) Regular: Regular Drywall with Mold Defense.
2) Fire Resistant - Type C: Firecheck Type C with Mold Defense.
b. National Gypsum Company:
1) Regular: Gold Bond Brand XP Wallboard.
2) Fire Resistant - Type C: Gold Bond Brand XP Fire - Shield C Wallboard.
c. United States Gypsum Company:
1) Regular: Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels, Humitek.
2) Fire Resistant - Type C: Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels, Humitek Firecode C.
C. Gypsum Board GB -3 - Fiberglass Surfacing; Tile Substrate; Humidity and Mold Resistant:
1. Description: ASTM C1396 and ASTM C1178, gypsum core treated for water resistance, with
fiberglass mat surfacing on faces and acrylic coating over front face, as applicable to type of
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -9
18JAN08
G D
gypsum board required for work and whichever is more stringent, for indoor applications, including
substrates for tile, paver tiles and like decoration, and unfinished work; not for paint finishes. Board
shall be resistant to consistent moisture and humidity exposure, and growth of mold when evaluated
meeting requirements of ASTM D3273, Panel Score 10 average minimum.
a. Regular: Coated fiberglass mat gypsum board, except as otherwise indicated by Contract
Documents. Manufacturer available thickness is 1/2 inch.
b. Fire Resistant - Type X: Coated fiberglass mat gypsum board with fire resistive core containing
additives to enhance integrity of core under fire exposure with fiberglass surfacing on faces and
acrylic coating on front face meeting requirements for Type X gypsum board, where required to
achieve fire resistance assembly ratings. Board shall be UL Classified Product with UL
Classification Marking..
c. Thickness: 5/8 inch minimum required, except as otherwise indicated by Contract Documents.
Also, meet thickness requirements of GA -216 and ASTM C840 for each application and support
spacing. Meet requirements for fire resistance assembly ratings.
d. Panel Size: 4 feet wide by maximum length available which will minimize quantity of end -to-end
joints in work.
e. Long Edge Profile: Square edges designed to reduce beading and ridging of joint treatment.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. G -P Gypsum Corporation.
1) Regular: DensShield Tile Guard.
2) Fire Resistant - Type X: DensShield Fireguard Tile Guard.
D. Gypsum Board GB -4 — Exterior Walls, Ceilings and Soffits:
a. Description: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard
edges.
1) See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers
and products. See Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
b. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
1) Product basis of design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens -Glass
Gold" by G -P Gypsum.
2) Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. except as otherwise indicated by Contract Documents.
Also, meet thickness requirements of GA -216 and ASTM C840 for each application and
support spacing. Meet requirements for fire resistance assembly ratings.
3) Long Edges: Standard taper plus special bevel or rounded edges designed to reduce
beading and ridging of joint treatment.
c. Panel Size: 4 feet wide by maximum length available which will minimize quantity of end joints in
work.
E. Gypsum Board GB -5 - Liner Panel; Paper Surfacing:
IE
1. Description: ASTM C1396, noncombustible, moisture and fire resistance gypsum core with multiple
paper smooth surfacing on faces, for indoor applications, including work for shaft walls, stairwells
and area separation walls, and unfinished work. Liner panels shall be Type X, UL Classified 13
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -10
18JAN08
• •
Product with UL Classification Marking. Manufacturer available thickness is 1 inch.
2. Thickness: 1 inch. Also, meet thickness requirements of GA -216 and ASTM C840 for each
application and support spacing. Meet requirements for fire resistance assembly ratings.
3. Panel Size: 2 feet wide by maximum length available which will minimize quantity of end -to -end
joints in work.
4. Long Edge Profile: Double beveled.
5. Acceptable Products:
a. Lafarge North America, Inc: Firecheck Shaftliner.
b. National Gypsum Company: Gold Bond Brand Fire - Shield Shaft Liner or Gold Bond Brand Fire-
Shield Shaft Liner XP.
c. United States Gypsum Company: Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Liner Panels.
2.03 BEAD AND TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Steel Beads and Trims - General: Bead and trim accessories of types required for board work, formed
of zinc coated steel, with depth to suit thickness of board panels, knurled and perforated or expanded
flanges, and ground beads for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Bead and trim units shall
meet requirements of ASTM C1047 and be of following configurations as applicable
1. Outside Corner Beads: Reinforcement for protecting outside corners of board work, with 1 -1/4 inch
wide flanges and ground beads for finishing with joint compound. United States Gypsum Company,
0 1 Dur -A -Bead 103.
2. Bullnose Beads: Reinforcement for protecting outside corners of board work, with 1/2 inch nose
radius, flanges and ground beads for finishing with joint compound.
3. Edge Trims: LC -Bead and L -Bead, of J and L configuration respectively, as required for application,
to provide protection and neat finish to edges of board work, with ground beads for finishing with
joint compound. United States Gypsum Company, J -Trim or L -Trim, 200 Series.
4. Exposed Face Edge Trims: Trim of J configuration to provide protection and neat finish to edges of
board work, with 1/2 inch wide exposed flange with hemmed edge and not requiring finishing with
joint compound. United States Gypsum Company, J -Stop 400 Series. Provide only where
specifically required by Contract Documents.
5. Control Joints: Expansion joint strip with 1/4 inch wide V -shape ex:xansion slot and integral flanges
with ground beads for finishing with joint compound. United States Gypsum Company, Control Joint
093.
B. Extruded Aluminum Beads and Trims - General:
1. Description: Bead and trim accessories of types required for board work, formed of extruded
aluminum to create reveals, junctures between materials and like details, of profiles required for
application. Units shall be straight or factory curved as applicable. Provide for paint finish, except as
otherwise required.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -11
18JAN08
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. MM Systems, Inc.
2.04 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Board:
1. General: ASTM C475; types meeting instructions and recommendations of board manufacturerfor
application.
2. Joint Tape: Perforated paper type.
3. Joint Reinforcement Tape: Glass fiber, open weave.
4. Joint Compounds: Dry powder type for mixing with water or ready -mixed type. Two separate
grades; one specifically for bedding tapes and filling depressions (chemically hardened type), and
one for topping and sanding (ready -mixed vinyl type).
B. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Basis -of- Design Product: G -P Gypsum; ToughRock Setting Compound.
2. Joints and skim coat for Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Sandable, chemically setting type
joint compound suitable for exterior and high humidity areas as recommended by sheathing board
manufacturer.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Auxiliary materials for gypsum board work of type and grade recommended by gypsum board
manufacturer.
B. Gypsum Board Fasteners: Screws meeting requirements of GA -216 and as recommended bygypsum
board manufacturer for application.
C. Fastening Adhesive: Type and grade of adhesive recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for
fastening board to structural supports or substrates.
D. Laminating Adhesive: Type and grade of adhesive or compound recommended by gypsum board
manufacturer for laminating gypsum boards together.
E. Spot Grout: For spot grouting hollow metal door frame anchors. ASTM C475, chemical hardening fast
setting type joint compound.
F. Sound Attenuation Blankets /Batts: Meet requirements of Section 07210 - Building Insulation. Friction fit
without membrane facing and recommended by manufacturer for maximum sound attenuation,
thicknesses as required for application.
G. Thermal Insulation Blanket/Batts: Meet requirements of Section 07210 - Building Insulation. Friction fit
with or without foil membrane face as applicable and thickness as required for application.
H. Vapor Barrier Tape: Meet requirements of Section 07210 - Building Insulation.
I. Acoustical Sealants: Meet requirements of Section 07920 - Joint Sealants, where concealed or
P1
PE
P1
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -12
18JAN08
• •
exposed to view in the completed Work.
40 J. Acoustical Pads: Non - hardening pliable compound in pad or sheet form with aggressive adhesive for
sound attenuation at external surfaces of electrical boxes and space between boxes and backside of
board. Pads shall have a sound transmission class rating same as required for partition or wall
construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION - METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. Meet requirements of GA -201 and ASTM C754 as applicable for type of substrate and gypsum
board support system required, and for installation of furring members, and instructions and
recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
2. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system. Frame both sides of joints with furring
and other supports as required.
3. Screw furring members.
B. Wall and Partition Support Systems:
1. General: Provide studs and furring of gages and at spacings for application as indicated by Contract
Documents meeting most stringent requirements governing in cases of similar or conflicting
conditions.
2. Runners: Install runner tracks at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where studs abut
other work, except as otherwise required.
3. Vertical Extent: Extend studs through acoustical ceilings and elsewhere as required to structural
support or substrate above ceiling.
4. Isolation: Isolate studs from transfer of structural loading from building structure, both horizontally
and vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type joint of dimension and detail to attain support meeting
specified performance loading requirements and to prevent abal loading.
5. Fastening: Fasten studs at ends of floor and ceiling runner tracks by installing a screw into both
flanges at each end. Crimping is acceptable, except at openings such as for doors and like
conditions.
6. Horizontal Stiffeners: Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system spaced 4 -1/2 feet on center
vertically; wire be at each intersection, except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Anchor
ends of horizontal stiffeners where system abuts columns or walls.
7. Supplementary Framing: Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in
board work, openings for other work and as required for support of both board construction and
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -13
18JAN08
0
other work to be supported by board system. Meet requirements for support of such items,
including details indicated by Contract Documents or if not otherwise indicated, meet applicable
instructions and recommendations of board manufacturer, or if not available, of United States
Gypsum Company - Gypsum Construction Handbook.
8. Spacing:
a. Space studs and furring members at 16 inches maximum centers, except as otherwise required
by Contract Documents.
b. For moisture resistant face board, space studs and furring members at 16 inches maximum
centers.
9. Special Framing:
a. Finish Material Framing -General: Frame walls and partitions to receive finish materials listed in
this Paragraph with 20 gage (0.0359 inch thick) minimum base steel, zinc coated, studs spaced
at 16 inches maximum centers. Depth of studs shall be 3 -5/8 inches minimum.
1) Tile.
2) Base material integral with floor material.
3) Other finish materials, except coatings.
b. Finish Material Framing - Paver Tiles: Frame walls and partitions to receive paver tiles of 324
square inches or larger with 18 gage (0.0478 inch thick) minimum base metal, zinc coated, studs
spaced at 16 inches maximum centers. Depth of studs shall be 3 -5/8 inches minimum.
c. Door and Window Opening Framing: Frame openings to meet details indicated or if not '
otherwise indicated, to meet applicable published instructions and recommendations of gypsum
board manufacturer, or if not available, of United States Gypsum Company - Gypsum
Construction Handbook. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to
jamb anchor clips on frames; install runner track section at head and sill as applicable, and
secure to jamb studs.
1) Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or
roof structure above, except as otherwise required.
2) Install two, 20 gage (0.0359 inch thick) studs at each jamb of each opening over 2 feet
wide.
3) Spot grout jamb anchor clips with spot grout.
4) Install horizontal stiffeners 6 inches above and 6 inches below each opening more than 3
feet wide, and extend two regular stud spaces beyond each jamb.
d. Corner Guards: Provide 18 gage (0.0478 inch thick) minimum base steel studs behind corner
guards.
e. Control Joints: Frame both sides of control joints with a separate stud. Do not bridge control
joints with components of stud system.
10. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Install sound attenuation blankets where required to achieve STC
ratings or fire resistance ratings, before installation of board unless blankets can be readily installed
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -14
18JAN08
• •
after board has been installed.
11. Insulation Furring: Install thermal insulation vertically and hold in place with Z- furring members
spaced at 16 inches maximum centers, except as otherwise required.
a. Except at outside corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails spaced at 24 inches maximum centers.
b. At outside corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending
beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of
attached channel. Start from this furring channel with standard width insulation panel and
continue in regular manner.
c. At inside corners, space second member 12 inches maximum from comer and cut insulation to
fit.
d. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with staples fabricated from 18 gage
minimum be wire and inserted through slot in web of member, or by an equivalent method
acceptable to Architect.
C. Ceiling Support Suspension Systems:
1. General: Complete ceiling suspension system with all supported loads, such as light fixtures,
diffusers or like items associated with ceiling.
2. Supported Loads: Light fixtures, diffusers or like items associated with ceding shall not be supported
from ceiling suspension systems if weight of such items exceed capability of suspension system or if
tolerances of suspension system will be exceeded. In such cases, load shall be supported by
supplementary hangers or shall be independently supported.
4D 3. Hangers: Suspended ceiling hangers from building structure.
a. Support hangers directly from building structural members. Do not support hangers from metal
deck, bracing; pipes, ducts, conduits and respective supports, and like items.
b. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objectswithin ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structure or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where
required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying or
other equally effective means.
c. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that interfere with location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent
devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
required performance limits.
d. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to anchorage
devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not
cause anchorage devices and fasteners to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion,
elevated temperatures or vibration.
e. Secure flat, angle, channel and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not
cause hangers to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, elevated temperatures or vibration.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -15
18JAN08
f. Sway brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
g. Wire be hanger wires to main runners or supports and twist at least 3 times to develop full
strength of wire.
4. Main Runners or Supports:
a. Space main runners or supports 4 feet on center and 6 inches from walls and space hangers 4
feet on center along runners, except as otherwise required.
b. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, measured both lengthwise on each
runner and transversely between parallel runners.
5. Furring:
a. Wire tie or clip furring members to main runners or supports and to other structural supports as
required.
b. Space furring members at 16 inches maximum centers, except as otherwise required.
c. For moisture resistant gypsum board, space furring at 16 inches maximum centers.
6. Supplementary Framing: Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in
board work, openings for other work and as required for support of both board construction and
other work to be supported by board system. Meet requirements for support of such items, including
details indicated by Contract Documents or if not otherwise indicated, meet applicable instructions
and recommendations of board manufacturer, or if not available, of United States Gypsum
Company- Gypsum Construction Handbook.
7. Perimeter: Attach perimeter wall track or angle wherever support system meets vertical surfaces.
Mechanically join support members to each other and butt cut to fit into wall track.
8. Special Framing:
a. Finish Material Framing - General: Frame ceilings to receive finish materials listed in this
Paragraph with 20 gage (0.0359 inch thick) minimum base steel, zinc coated, framing members
spaced at 16 inches maximum centers. Depth of framing members shall be 3 -5/8 inches
minimum.
1) Tile.
2) Other finish materials, except coatings.
b. Seismic Forces: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements.
c. Control Joints: Frame both sides of control joints with a separate framing unit. Do not bridge
control joint with components of framing system.
9. Sound Attenuation and Insulation: Provide where indicated by Contract Documents meeting
applicable requirements of Section 07210 - Building Insulation.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM BOARD
A. Coordination:
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -16
18JAN08
• •
11
1. Do not proceed with board installation until framing, bracing, blocking and other supports for
subsequently applied work have been installed.
2. Do not install board until sound attenuation blankets, thermal insulation, firestopping of electrical
boxes in fire rated walls and acoustical pads over electrical boxes in sound rated partitions to be
concealed by board has been installed.
B. General:
1. Standards: Meet requirements of GA -216 and ASTM C840, except where more detailed or more
stringent requirements are specked in this Section or by instructions and recommendations of
board manufacturer. Meet requirements for required fire resistance ratings.
2. Locate exposed end butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not
less than 1 foot in alternate courses of board.
3. Install wall and partition boards vertically to avoid end butt joints wherever possible. At stairwells
and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. For fire
resistance rated assemblies, orient boards meeting requirements of assembly.
4. Install ceiling boards in direction and manner which will minimize number of end butt joints, and
which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 1 foot.
5. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp
boards. Butt boards together for a tight contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch
open space between boards. Do not force into place.
7*3
6. Locate edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so both
tapered edge joints abut, and mill cut or field cut end joints abut. Do not place tapered edges
against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
7. Attach gypsum board to framing and blocking as required for additional support at openings and
cutouts.
8. After scoring face paper and breaking core, cut back paper; do not tear or snap.
9. Form control joints in gypsum board construction where required, otherwise as recommended by
standards and instructions of gypsum board manufacturer as acceptable to Architect. Allow 1/2
inch continuous opening between edges of adjacent boards to allow for insertion of control joint trim
accessory.
10. Do not locate joints within 8 inches of comers or openings, except where control joints are required
to be at jamb lines or where openings occur adjacent to corners in partition /wall layout. Where
necessary, place a single vertical joint over center of wide openings.
11. Install gypsum board on both faces of stud partition framing above ceilings and in similar concealed
spaces, except in chase walls which are properly braced internally.
12. Where partition in concealed spaces is not required for STC rating, fire resistance rating or control
of air distribution, smoke or heat, then studs may be faced with scraps of gypsum board applied in a
single layer. Apply each piece with two or more screws in each stud, 12 inches maximum screw
spacing. Cover at least 75 percent of each face.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
18JAN08
09250 -17
13. Isolate gypsum board from structural loads meeting requirements of Paragraph - Performance
Requirements, of this Section. Isolate perimeter of non -load axial bearing walls and partitions at
structural abutments, such as decks, ceilings and vertical structural elements. Provide not less than
1/2 inch, nor more than 1/2 inch gap between gypsum and structure, except for greater dimension
required to prevent transfer of loads from building structure components. Finish edges of face layer
with J -type (semi - finishing) casing bead. Seal space between casing bead and structure with
continuous acoustical sealant bead, except as otherwise required for fire rated assemblies. Attach
gypsum board to studs 1/2 inch minimum below bottom edge of ceiling runner flanges and to first
stud adjacent to vertical tracks. Do not attach board directly to runners.
14. Where columns are to be enclosed with gypsum board construction, provide freestanding vertical
furring as required to support gypsum board with 1/2 inch minimum clearance between column and
furring.
C. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum
board with floating internal comer construction, except where isolation of intersecting boards are
required or control joints are required.
D. Sealing Perimeters and Penetrations:
1. At partitions, provide continuous beads of acoustical sealant at comer juncture of both vertical faces
of runners of plates with floor and ceiling construction, and wherever work abuts dissimilar
materials. Do not provide sealant between the runners and the floor and ceiling construction. Seal
after installation of gypsum boards. Sealing work shall meet requirements of ASTM C919.
2. At ceilings, provide continuous beads of acoustical sealant wherever permanent work abuts
dissimilar materials. Use acoustical tape at suspended acoustical ceilings.
3. At control joints, provide continuous bead of sealant between edges of gypsum boards. Seal prior
to installation of surface applied control joint accessories and locate at proper depth in joint to allow
for insertion of expansion portion of control joint accessory.
4. Open Spaces: At openings and cutouts, fill open spaces between edges of gypsum board and
fixtures, cabinets, ducts and other flush or penetrating items, with continuous bead of acoustical
sealant.
5. Electrical Boxes: Seal external surfaces of electrical boxes which penetrate surface of non -fire
rated partitions and overlap space between boxes and backside of board with acoustical pads,
completely closing openings and joints.
E. Sound Rated Work:
1. General: Sound rated applications are defined to include following types of construction:
a. Single layer assemblies where sound transmission classification (STC) is required.
b. Multiple layer assemblies where two or more layers are applied to supporting structure including
following:
1) Balanced walls or partitions with two or more layers applied to both faces of supports.
2) Unbalanced walls or partitions with one layer applied to one face and two layers applied to
other face of supports.
c. Resilient furring applications of gypsum board.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -18
18JAN08
• •
2. Perimeter: Seal perimeter of sound rated work meeting requirements of ASTM C919 and as
follows:
a. At partitions, provide continuous beads of acoustical sealant at corner juncture of both vertical
faces of runners of plates with floor and ceiling construction, and wherever work abuts dissimilar
materials. Do not provide sealant between runners and floor and ceiling construction. Seal after
installation of gypsum boards.
b. At ceilings, provide continuous beads of acoustical sealant wherever permanent work abuts
dissimilar materials. Use acoustical tape at movable partitions and acoustical ceilings.
c. At control joints, provide continuous bead of sealant between edges of gypsum boards. Seal
prior to installation of surface applied control joint accessories and locate at proper depth in joint
to allow for insertion of expansion portion of control joint accessory.
d. Provide double seal at laminated partition faces. Install face layer with 1/4 inch edge clearance
at termination of work, and install continuous bead of acoustical sealant all around.
3. Open Spaces: At openings and cutouts, fill open spaces between edges of gypsum board and
fixtures, cabinets, ducts and other flush or penetrating items, with continuous bead of acoustical
sealant.
4. Electrical Boxes: Seal external surfaces of electrical boxes which penetrate surface of non -fire
rated partitions and overlap space between boxes and backside of board with acoustical pads,
completely closing openings and joints.
5. Sound Flanking Paths: Where sound rated partitions intersect non -sound rated walls or partitions,
extend sound rated construction to completely close sound flanking paths through non -rated
construction. Seal joints between face layers at vertical interior angles of intersecting walls and
partitions.
6. Sound Attenuation Insulation:
a. Walls and Partitions: Install sound attenuation blankets/batts, in partitions where required.
Completely blanket space between studs to full height of walls and partitions. Fit carefully behind
electrical outlets and other work which penetrates partitions. Attach to back face of gypsum
board meeting instructions of manufacturer.
b. Ceilings: Install sound attenuation blankets/batts over gypsum board ceiling areas where
required. Provide two equal thickness layers of blankets /batts of total thickness required. Lay
first layer of insulation directly on ceiling system and lay second layer of insulation on first layer
with joints between layers staggered 12 inches minimum. Lay blankets/batts over interrupting
items. Do not lay blankets/batts over light fixtures, unless light fixtures are rated for such
coverage. Tightly fit blankets/batts together and to adjacent construction. Close openings to
provide complete coverage.
F. Methods:
1. General: In addition to compliance with standards, meet speck requirements for each type or
arrangement of gypsum board. Otherwise, options permitted by standards, including
recommendations of manufacturer are optional.
2. Single Layer Wall and Partition Assemblies: Install exposed gypsum board in manner required.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -19
18JAN08
C�
a. Apply boards vertically and provide board lengths that minimize end joints.
b. For parallel applications, locate edge joints over supports; for right angle applications, stagger
end joints over supports.
c. Fasten with screws.
d. Substrate for Rigid Base Finish Materials: Where board is required as a substrate for rigid base
finish materials, such as tile, paver tiles, terrazzo, resinous flooring or other rigid base material,
install board of types as indicated in Article - Board Schedule, of this Section.
3. Multiple Layer Wall and Partition Assemblies:
a. Install base layer of gypsum board and face layer of gypsum board of types as indicated in
Article - Board Schedule, of this Section. Apply layers vertically, with joints of base layer over
supports and joints of any intermediate layer and face layer offset at least 10 inches with joints of
subsequent layer. Provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints in face layer.
b. Fasten base layer with screws.
c. Fasten any intermediate layer with screws.
d. Laminate face layer to subsequent layer with laminating adhesive.
1) Brace or temporarily fasten face layer until adhesive has dried.
2) Supplement adhesive with permanent screw fastening of face layer through base layer and
into supports.
4. Single Layer Ceiling Assemblies: Apply exposed gypsum board on ceilings, before applications of
walls and partitions, to greatest extent possible.
a. Apply in direction which will minimize end joints.
b. Fasten with screws.
c. For parallel applications, locate edge joints over supports; for right angle applications, stagger
end joints over supports.
5. Direct Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum board is to be directly adhered to a substrate, other
than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board, meet instructions of gypsum
board manufacturer and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening adhesive has set.
G. Partition Insulation: Install sound attenuation blankets, in partitions where required. Completely blanket
space between studs to full height of partitions. Fit carefully behind electrical outlets and similar work
which penetrates partitions. Attach to back face of gypsum board meeting instructions of manufacturer.
H. Thermal Insulation Blankets: Install meeting instructions of manufacturer for particular application.
Extend full thickness over entire area to be insulated, without gaps or voids. Provide placement and
securement to ensure non - displacement and non - sagging after gypsum board finish has been placed.
Tape foil facing to face of metal studs and tape tears and holes in foil facing.
3.04 INSTALLATION - BEAD AND TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General:
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -20
18JAN08
• •
1. Coordination: Coordinate and integrate installation of bead and trim accessories with installation of
board.
2. Types: Beads and trims shall be of types as applicable for application and as follows, except as
otherwise required by Contract Documents.
a. Indoor Work - General: Steel beads and trims.
b. Extruded Aluminum Beads and Trims: Where indicated by Contract Documents.
3. Installation: Meet requirements of ASTM C840 and ASTM C1047, and instructions and
recommendations of manufacturer. Miter comers of exposed bead and trim accessory units,
provide hairline joints, align joints and support to eliminate offsets. Position and install bead and trim
accessory units straight, level and plumb, and with flanges and fasteners concealed in completed
work.
a. Steel Beads and Trims: Where feasible, use same fasteners to anchor bead and trim flanges of
steel beads and trims as required to fasten board to supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges of
beads and trims by nailing or stapling meeting instructions and recommendations of board, and
bead and trim manufacturers.
B. Application:
1. Outside Corner Beads: Install corner beads at outside corners of board work.
2. Edge Trim: Install edge trim, where edge of board would otherwise be exposed or semi - exposed.
Provide edge trim type with flange found to receive joint compound, except where otherwise
required.
a. Install LC -Bead trim (J -trim) at following locations and elsewhere as required:
1) Where edges of board panels are abutted to adjacent construction, and back flange can be
attached to framing or supporting construction.
2) At gasket filled or sealant filled building expansion joints; install back -to -back units spaced
1/4 inch if not otherwise required.
b. Install L -Bead trim (L -trim) where edges of board panels are tightly abutted to adjacent
construction and edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board panels are installed.
c. Install LC -Bead trim (J -trim) with exposed face flange, at locations only where specifically
required by Contract Documents.
3. Control Joints:
a. Install control joints at locations indicated by Contract Documents, otherwise meet requirements
of ASTM C840 as acceptable to Architect for visual effect. Provide control joints at following
locations, except as otherwise indicated by Contract Documents:
1) At inside corners.
2) At any point where mass of area is reduced and intermittently such that no expanse of
board exceeds 30 feet in any direction.
3) At door, window and other frames, provide one control joint above each jamb, extend full
height.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -21
18JAN08
4) Where board is vertically continuous, as at a stairwell, provide horizontal control joints at
each floor level. J,
b. Jamb control joints maybe omitted wherever following conditions are met:
1) Spacing: Control joint spacing of 30 feet maximum is not exceeded.
2) Single Layer Assembly: No joints between wall panels occur at line of jambs on either side
of partition.
3) Multiple Layer Assembly: Panel joints of base layer, any intermediate layer and face layer
shall not be aligned on same stud. Face layer joint locations shall be same as required for
single layer assembly.
3.05 INSTALLATION - BOARD FINISHING
A. General:
1. Meet requirements of GA -216, GA -214 and ASTM C840, except where more detailed or more
stringent requirements are specified in this Section or by instructions and recommendations of
board manufacturer. Meet requirements of required fire ratings and sound transmission class
ratings.
2. Mix, handle and apply board finishing materials meeting instructions and recommendations of
manufacturer. Apply treatment at joints both directions, flanges of trim accessories (but not semi -
finishing types), penetrations of board (electrical boxes, piping and similar work), fastener heads,
surface defects and elsewhere as required. Apply in manner which will result in each item being
concealed when applied decoration has been completed.
B. Levels of Finish: Provide levels of finish based on GA -214 as follows, except as otherwise required:
1. General:
a. Where open joints of more than 1/16 inch occur, including edges of boards with rounded or
beveled corners, prefill joint with special chemical hardening type bedding compound, prior to
bedding of joint tape.
b. Apply joint tape at joints between boards, except where a trim accessory is required.
c. Do not use topping compound for bedding joint tape.
d. Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between
last 2 coats and after last coat.
e. Do not use bedding compound for final coat of joint treatment, unless specifically recommended
by manufacturer for that use.
2. Concealed Surfaces: Level 1, except for fire rated construction Level 2.
3. Exposed Surfaces:
a. Interior, Typical: Level 4.
b. Exterior soffits and ceilings: Skim coat.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -22
18JAN08
711
L
c. Base for Tile and Paver Tile: Level 2 with joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and
ridges.
d. Base for Semi -Gloss or Gloss Coatings, Severe Lighting Areas or Light Reflectivity: Level 5.
C. Substrate for Rigid Base Finish Materials: Where board is required as a substrate for rigid base finish
materials, such as tile, paver tiles, terrazzo, resinous flooring or other rigid base material, do not apply
finish coats over joint tape, except for fire rated and sound transmission class rated walls provide Level
2 with joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Avoid build -up of tape and compound
which would telegraph. Finish fastener heads with one finish coat only.
n7
D. Substrate for Flexible Wall Coverings: Where board is intended as a substrate for adhesive application
of flexible wall coverings, meet instructions of manufacturer for applying joint compound and joint tape
in minimum thicknesses over end joints and cut joints, so as to avoid a build -up of tape and compound
which would telegraph through. Select topping coat for maximum strength and bond with board.
E. Partial Finishing: Omit finishing only where specifically required to be unfinished. Omit third (topping)
coat of compound and omit sanding where required for partial finish and where work is concealed,
including wall and partition surfaces above suspended ceilings where work is required for fire
resistance, smoke barrier, sound attenuation, air supply or return plenum or similar purposes.
F. Reference: Refer to finish specification sections for decorative finishes to be applied to gypsum board.
3.06 INSTALLATION - MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Coordinate and integrate where necessary installation of trim accessories. Install
miscellaneous materials meeting instructions of manufacturer.
3.07 BOARD SCHEDULE
A. General: Where Contract Documents do not indicate a specific type board product, provide board
product of respective type for board location indicated in this Schedule. In addition, provide board
product of appropriate type at locations not specifically scheduled as required for application.
B. Applications:
1. General: Required applications of board product include, but are not limited to, applications
indicated in this Schedule.
2. Fire Resistant: Provide fire resistant boards which are UL Classified Products with UL Classification
Markings wherever fire resistance assemblies are required in the Work.
C. Indoor Locations:
1. Partitions, Walls and Ceilings - General:
a. Standard: Substrate for following, except as otherwise indicated by Contract Documents:
1) Tile: Board Types GB -3.
2) Paint Finishes and Wall Coverings: Board Types GB -1, GB -2.
3) Unfinished Spaces: Board Types GBA, GB -2.
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
18JAN08
09250 -23
b. Humidity and Mold Resistant: Substrate for following, except as otherwise indicated by Contract
Documents:
1) Tile: Board Type GB -3.
2) Paint Finishes: Board Type GB -2.
3) Wall Coverings: Board Type GB -2.
4) Unfinished Spaces: Board Types GB -2, GB -3.
c. Glass faced gypsum sheathing:
1) Areas: Outer surfaces of exterior walls, Exterior soffits and ceilings. Substrate for exterior
siding, stucco and applied stone finishes. Exposed soffits and ceilings with skim coat.
2) Regular: Board Type GB -4.
d. Liner Panels:
1) Areas: Inner ply of shaft walls, elevator hoistways, stairwells, and fire separation walls.
2) Regular: Board Type GB -5.
END OF SECTION
MON
F]
AESI 27210 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -24
18JAN08
•
7
TORCHIA ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 09300
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and
Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Tile is indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessaryand incidental to
completion and performance of the Work.
C. Included: Tile includes, but is not limited to, following:
1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Glazed ceramic mosaic tile.
3. Glazed ceramic wall tile.
4. Ceramic paver tile.
5. Natural stone tile pavers.
6. Metal edge strips.
7. Marble thresholds.
8. Sealing expansion, control and other joints in the work with elastomeric joint sealant
D
D. Installation Schedule: Required types of tile installation assemblies include, but are not limited to,
systems, materials and installation locations specified in Article - Installation Systems, at end of this
Section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Tile: Tile unit with face size less than 6 inches square or face areas less than 36 square inches.
B. Paver Tile: Tile unit with face size 6 inches square or more or face area 36 square inches or more.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. ANSI A108 Series - .Installation Specifications.
2. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
3. ANSI A118 Series - Mortar and Grout Material Specifications.
4. ANSI A137.1 - Ceramic Tile.
5. TCA - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
6. USDOJ - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
7. Handicapped people accessibility codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. General: Work shall meet performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents, including
requirements specified in this Paragraph and in other parts of this Section
it TORCHIA TILE
18JAN08
09300 -1
2. Handicapped Accessibility Standards: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance
Requirements.
3. Slip Resistance: Meet requirements of Section 01415- Performance Requirements.
4. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide expansion and control joints meeting following criteria:
a. TCA -Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, Joint Design Essentials EJ171.
b. Floor Areas in kitchen and dishwashing spaces subject to thermal shock from contact with hot
fluids or like conditions.
C. Types, Colors and Patterns: Provide tile materials based on requirements indicated by Contract
Documents, including following:
1. Material Colors:
a. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile: See Finish Schedules on "I" series sheets for more detailed
descriptions.
b. Stone Tiles: See Finish Schedules on "I" series sheets for more detailed descriptions.
c. Grout: See Finish Schedules on "I" series sheets for more detailed descriptions.
2. Mortar and Grout Colors: Unless otherwise required, provide following:
a. Mortar Color: Use white mortar under light color tiles and pavers and grey mortar or other colors.
b. Grout Colors: Provide colors in range exceeding or equivalent to Custom Building Products
Standard, Designer Series and Impressions Series. Provide custom colors as applicable. See
Finish Schedules on "I" series sheets for more detailed descriptions.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualifications:
1. When using setting and grouting materials manufactured under Tile Council of America (TCA)
license, include identification and formula number on each container.
2. Provide materials obtained from only one source for each type of bed, joint, tile material and color to
minimize variations in appearance and quality. Provide warranted waterproofing, mortar setting and
grouting materials of same manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall specialize in performing work of this Section and have 5 years
minimum documented experience in design, detailing, installation and maintenance of type and quality
required for work. Upon request, provide proof of qualifications.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and installation
instructions of manufacturer for each product. Include published data, certified conformance report or
certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating each proposed material meets
requirements of Contract Documents.
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -2
18JAN08
• s
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for installation of file and accessories. Indicate typical and any
special details of installation, and layout arrangement of expansion and control joints.
C. Samples - Initial Selection: Submit color charts of manufacturer consisting of actual tiles or sections of
file showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of file required. Include
samples of grout and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples - Verification: Submit samples of each type and color of file required, mounted on 12 inches
square minimum size plywood or hardboard backing, and grouted. Submit one full size sample of each
tile trim piece and the accessory.
E. Tile Certification - Master Grade: Furnish Master Grade Certificate for each shipment and type of tile,
signed by manufacturer and installer.
F. Certification - Frost Proof Tile: Submit certification for frost proof tile attesting frost proof qualities,
including non - crazing or non - spalling of file.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver packaged materials and store in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use, meeting instructions of manufacturer. Keep tile cartons and cemenfitious
materials dry.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temperature: Maintain temperature of not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit during file installation and
for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard
or instructions of manufacturer.
B. Environmental Conditions: Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after
installation to meet requirements of referenced standards and instructions of manufacturer.
C. Lighting: Illuminate work areas during installation at same level, or higher, as will be required for the
completed work.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Manual: Furnish maintenance data for tile.
B. Products: Furnish supply of extra 2 percent of each type and color tile and paver used.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranty work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except warrantyshall include
additional requirements specified in this Article.
B. Coverage:
1. General: Defective materials and workmanship shall include, but not be limited to, abnormal
deterioration, discoloration of finishes and failure of work to meet or perform to other design criteria
and performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents.
2. Membrane: Warranty shall extend to repair or replacement of membrane work which leaks water,
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -3
18JAN08
fails to prevent fracture, and otherwise fails to perform as required within the warranty time period
due to failure of materials and workmanship. Warranty shall include removal and replacement of
other materials and work covering waterproofing, to the extent required to repair or replace
waterproofing work, which shall be responsibility of membrane manufacturer.
C. Costs: Warranty shall be without cost limitation and at no cost to Contract Sum.
D. Signatures: Warranty shall be signed by Contractor, installer and manufacturer.
E. Time Period: Extend warranty time period to 5 years.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS -GENERAL
A. Colors, Textures and Patterns:
General: For tile and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures or other
appearance characteristics, provide products to match characteristics required or, if not otherwise
required, as selected by Architect from standards of manufacturer.
2. Trim and Accessories: Provide tile trim and accessories which match color and finish of adjoining
flat tile as acceptable to Architect.
3. Size and Joint Alignment: Size and joint of adjacent wall, base and floor tile and any associated trim
shall be coordinated and in alignment, except as otherwise required.
B. Non -Paver Tile Mounting: J
1. General: Provide factory back edge mounted (elastomeric dot) the assemblies as standard with
manufacturer, unless another mounting method is required.
2. Wet Areas: Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back edge mounted tile
assemblies, unless file manufacturer specifies that this type of mounting is suitable for these kinds of
use and has been successfully used on other projects.
C. Slip Resistant Tile: Where required, provide tile with slip resistant surface of fused aluminum oxide or
other rustproof aggregate of comparable hardness, uniformly impregnated on face of the at rate of 7.5
percent minimum. Tile showing uneven distribution is not acceptable. Also, meet requirements of
Section 01415 - Performance Requirements.
D. Frost Proof Tile: Provide frost proof tile for work located in refrigerated spaces, including coolers and
freezers, and outdoors.
2.02 TILE MATERIALS
A. Unglazed Ceramic Tile:
1. Grade: ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade.
2. Type: Porcelain body units evenly colored throughout tile thickness with water absorption of 0.5
percent maximum.
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -4
18JAN08
•
9
3. Size: See Finish Schedules on "I" series sheets for more detailed descriptions.
0 B. Glazed Ceramic Tile:
1. Grade: ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade.
2. Type: Porcelain body units evenly colored throughout file thickness with water absorption of 0.5
percent maximum.
3. Size: See Finish Schedules on "I" series sheets for more detailed descriptions.
C. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile:
1. Grade: ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade.
2. Type: Natural clay, non - vitreous body units with water absorption of 7 percent maximum.
3. Size: See Finish Schedules on "I" series sheets for more detailed descriptions.
D. Stone Paver Tile.
1. Type: Stone with following properties:
a. Size, shape and pattern: See Finish Schedules on "I" series sheets for more detailed
descriptions.
b. Finish: See Finish Schedules on "I" series sheets for more detailed descriptions.
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar Bed Materials:
1. General: Portland cement, sand and other materials as required for mortar bed system meeting
requirements of ANSI A108.1.
2. Latex Additive:
a. Description: Proprietary compound of styrene butadiene latex or acrylic latex and additives
formulated for use with portland cement mortar bed materials; meet requirements of ANSI
A118.4 and providing following mortar properties. Provide latexadditive suitable for mixing with
dry mortar materials.
1) Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi minimum at 28 days when evaluated meeting
requirements of ASTM C109.
b. Acceptable Products:
1) Bostik Inc., Hydroment Multi- Purpose Acrylic.
2) Custom Building Products, Custom Acrylic Mortar Admix
3) Laticrete International, Inc., 3701 Latex Mortar and Grout Additive.
4) Mapei Corporation, Panicrete 50.
5) TEC Incorporated, TA -870 Crete Latex Additive.
B. Dry Set Mortar:
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -5
18JAN08
1. Mortar:
a. Description: Proprietary pre - packaged compound of portland cement and additives, formulated
for type of tile, factory sanded, factory blended; meet requirements of ANSI A118.1. Provide
product recommended by manufacturer as being suitable for using with latex additive.
b. Acceptable Products - Floor Tile:
1) Bostik Inc., Tile Mate 971.
2) Custom Building Products, Custom Thin Set Mortar.
3) Laticrete International, Inc., Drybond Floor N'Wall Thin Set Mortar 272 (gray) or 292 (white).
4) Mapei Corporation, Kerabond.
5) TEC Incorporated, Full Set TA -370 (gray) or TA -371 (white).
c. Acceptable Products - Wall Tile:
1) Bostik Inc., Tile Mate 710.
2) Custom Building Products, Custom Thin Set Mortar.
3) Laticrete International, Inc., Drybond Floor N'Wall Thin Set Mortar 272 (gray) or 292 (white).
4) Mapei Corporation, Kerabond.
5) TEC Incorporated, Full Set Plus TA -380 (gray) or TA -381 (white).
2. Latex Additive:
a. Description: Proprietary compound of styrene butadiene latex or acrylic latex and additives
formulated for use with dry, dry set mortar material; meeting requirements of ANSI A118.4 and
providing following mortar properties. Provide latex additive suitable for mixing with dry, dry-set
mortar material.
1) Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi minimum at 28 days when evaluated meeting
requirements of ASTM C109.
2) Bond Strength: 500 psi minimum at 28 days, when evaluated meeting requirements of ANSI
Al 18.4.
b. Acceptable Products:
1) Bostik Inc., Hydroment Multi- Purpose Acrylic Mortar Admixture & Grout Additive.
2) Custom Building Products, Acrylic Mortar Admix
3) Laticrete International, Inc., Laticrete 3701 Mortar Admix
4) Mapei Corporation, Keraply.
5) TEC Incorporated, TA -867 Full Bond.
C. Medium Bed Dry Set Mortar:
1. Mortar:
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -6
18JAN08
a. Description: Proprietary pre - packaged compound of portland cement and additives, formulated
for type of tile, factory sanded, factory blended; meeting requirements of ANSI A118.1. Provide
product recommended by manufacturer as being suitable for using with latex additive.
b. Acceptable Products for Floor and Wall Tile:
1) Bostik Inc., Med Bed Mortar.
2) Custom Building Products, Marble and Granite Mortar Mix
3) Laticrete International, Inc., 220 Medium Bed Mortar.
4) Mapei Corporation, Ultra/Flor Medium Bed Mortar.
5) TEC Incorporated, TA -372 (gray) or TA -373 (white) Medium Bed Mortar.
2. Latex Additive:
a. Description: Proprietary compound of styrene butadiene latex or acrylic latex and additives
formulated for use with dry, dry set mortar material; meeting requirements of ANSI A118.4 and
providing following mortar properties. Provide latex additive suitable for mixing with dry, dry-set
mortar material.
1) Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi minimum at 28 days when evaluated meeting
requirements of ASTM C109.
n-
2) Bond Strength: 500 psi minimum at 28 days when evaluated meeting requirements of ANSI
A118.4.
b. Acceptable Products:
1) Bostik Inc., Hydroment Flex A -Lastic Flexible Mortar Admixture.
2) Custom Building Products, Acrylic Mortar Admix
3) Laticrete International, Inc., Latricrete 3701 Mortar Admix
4) Mapei Corporation, Keraply.
5) TEC Incorporated, TA -866 Tile Bond II.
D. Epoxy Mortar:
1. Description: Multi- component 100 percent solids epoxy mortar meeting requirements of ANSI
A118.3, applicable requirements of TCA Formula AAR -II, and USDA and FDA acceptability
regulations. When required, provide high temperature and low temperature resistance types. Fresh
mortar shall be water cleanable.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Bostik, Inc., Color -Poxy Mortar.
b. Custom Building Products, 100% Solids Epoxy Mortar.
c. Laticrete International, Inc., Latapoxy 300 Epoxy Adhesive.
d. Mapei Corporation, Kerapoxy 100% Solids Epoxy Mortar and Grout.
e. TEC Incorporated, TA-470 Epoxy Grout and Mortar.
E. Organic Adhesive:
TORCHIA TILE
18JAN08
09300 -7
1. Description: ANSI A136.1, Type I, ready to use material.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Bostik Inc., Hydroment 7001 Mastic.
b. Custom Building Products, Acryl -4000 Ceramic Tile Mastic.
c. Laticrete International, Inc., Laticrete 15 Multi- Mastic.
d. Mapei, Inc., Ultra/Mastic 1.
e. TEC Incorporated, TA -122 Double Duty Adhesive.
2.04 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Dry Set Grout:
1. Grout:
a. Description: Proprietary pre - packaged compound of portland cement and additives formulated
for type of tile, with sand and without sand as required for application, factory blended; meeting
requirements of ANSI A118.6. Provide product recommended by manufactureras being suitable
or using with latex additive. Pigments shall be mineral oxides unaffected by alkalinity and
weathering. Furnish pigmented grout as selected by Architect from standard colors of
manufacturer.
b. Acceptable Products:
1) Sanded:
a) Bostik Inc., Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout.
b) Custom Building Products, Polyblend Sanded Grout.
c) Laticrete International, Inc., Floor Grout and Joint Filler 500 Series.
d) Mapei Corporation, Keracolor Floor.
e) TEC Incorporated, TA -670 Sanded Floor Grout.
2) Non - Sanded:
a) Bostik Inc., Hydroment Dry Tile Grout.
b) Custom Building Products, Polyblend Dry Tile Grout.
c) Laticrete International, Inc., Dry Set Wall Grout 600 Series.
d) Mapei Corporation, Keracolor Wall.
e) TEC Incorporated, TA -610 Colored Wall Grout.
2. Latex Additive:
a. Description: Proprietary compound of styrene butadiene latex or acrylic latex and additives
P]
P]
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -8
18JAN08
EJ
formulated for use with dry set grout; meeting requirements of ANSI A118.6 and providing
following grout properties. Provide latex additive suitable for mixing with dry, dry set grout
material.
1) Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi minimum at 28 days when evaluated meeting
requirements of ASTM C109.
b. Acceptable Products:
1) Bostik Inc., Hydroment Multi- Purpose Acrylic Mortar Admixture and Grout Additive.
2) Custom Building Products, Tile Grout Admix.
3) Laticrete International, Inc., 1776 Grout Admix Plus.
4) Mapei Corporation, Plastijoints.
5) TEC Incorporated, TA -869 Acrylic Grout Additive.
B. Epoxy Grout - Typical:
1. Description: Multi- component 100 percent solids epoxy grout meeting requirements of ANSI A118.3,
applicable requirements of TCA Formula AAR -11, and USDA and FDA acceptability regulations.
When required, provide high temperature and low temperature resistance types. Fresh grout shall
be water cleanable.
2. Acceptable Products:
7
a. Bostik Inc., Hydroment Color -Poxy Grout.
b. Custom Building Products, 100% Solids Epoxy Grout.
c. Laticrete International, Inc., Latapoxy SPA 00.
d. Mapei Corporation, Kerapoxy 100% Solids Epoxy Mortar and Grout.
e. TEC Incorporated, TA470 Epoxy Grout and Mortar.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Mat sound insulation and underlayment:
1. Dodge Regupol, QT 4010 scu (10mm).
B. Polyethylene Cleavage Membrane: ASTM C171, polyethylene sheet, 6 mil minimum thickness.
C. Waterproof and Anti - Fracture Membrane:
1. Description: Thin, load bearing, cold liquid applied styrene copolymer latex elastomer with integral
rot resistant reinforcing fabric seamless waterproofing membrane meeting requirements of ASTM
C836 and recommended by manufacturer as a waterproofing and crack suppression membrane
beneath thin set mortar set tile. Provide auxiliary materials required for priming, and treatment of
cracks, joints, terminations and penetrations as applicable.
a. General: Not fail in excess of limitations published by manufacturer.
b. Watertightness: Watertight when subjected to a waterhead to 30 feet with pressure applied to
TORCHIA TILE
18JAN08
09300 -9
non - bonded surface of waterproofing.
c. Resistance: Resistant to urine, dilute acids and alkalis, food wastes and brine.
d. Elasticity: Capable of bridging cracks up to 1/16 inch wide that occur in substrate after
waterproofing is installed.
e. Service Temperature: -20 to +280 degrees Fahrenheit.
f. Shear Bond Strength: 350 psi minimum to concrete.
g. Compatibility: Compatible with materials to which waterproofing is in contact.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Laticrete International, Inc., Laticrete 9235.
D. Reinforcing Mesh: Welded wire fabric meeting requirements of ANSI A108.1, galvanized, 2" x2 "/16 x 16
gage.
E. Metal Lath: ASTM C841, expanded diamond mesh, galvanized steel, weighing 3.4 pounds persquare
yard. Self - furring where used over solid substrates.
F. Edge Trims - Aluminum:
1. Description: Solid extruded aluminum trim units of profile required for application and with clear
anodic finish. Trim units shall have anchoring leg with integral provisions for anchorage to substrate
and small radius lip on edges to protect tile edge from impact. Vertical leg shall be angled slightlyto
distribute stress away from file edge. Height or depth dimension to be flush with and match adjacent
tile work.
a. Edge Strips: Edge trim unit with 1/8 inch reveal at exposed top edge.
b. External Corners: Edge trim unit with rounded profile of height or depth to be flush with and
match thickness of adjacent tile work.
c. Floor Transition: Edge trim unit which provides a stepless transition where non -level floor
surfaces meet; meeting accessibility codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
d. Expansion and Control Joints: Prefabrication calk joint consisting of two solid lateral angles with
factory installed two component polyurethane sealant of color to match grout joint color as
acceptable to Architect.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Blanke Corporation.
b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.
c. USA: Schluter Systems LP.
G. Edge Trim - Stainless Steel:
1. Description: Roll formed stainless steel trim units of profile required for application and with satin
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -10
18JAN08
0 •
finish. Trim units shall have anchoring leg with integral provisions for anchorage to substrate and
small radius lip on edges to protect tile edge from impact. Vertical leg shall be angled slightly to
distribute stress awayfrom the edge. Height or depth dimension to be flush with and match adjacent
file work.
a. Edge Strips: Edge trim unit with 1/8 inch reveal at exposed top edge.
b. External Comers: Edge trim unit with rounded profile of height or depth to be flush with and
match thickness of adjacent tile work.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. USA: Schluter Systems LP.
H. Marble Thresholds: Sound MIA Group A, marble meeting requirements of ASTM C503 and with an
abrasive hardness of 10.0 minimum when evaluated meeting requirements of ASTM C241.
1. Type: White marble, unless otherwise required.
2. Bevel: Long bevel (half bevel), double bevel (1/4 inch each side), single bevel (1/4 inch one side
only) or other bevel as required by finished floor surface elevation and material thickness.
I. Sealants: Meet requirements of Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. Furnish polyurethane type sealant
associated with floors, except as otherwise required.
J. Tile Cleaner:
1. Description: Product specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout and as recommended
by National Tile Promotion Federation or Ceramic Tile Institute.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Manufactured by grout manufacturer.
b. Hillyard Chemical Co.
c. ProSoCo, Inc.
K. Sealer:
1. Description: Penetrating sealer, no surface film, specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and
grout to prevent dirt impregnation and staining.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Manufactured by grout manufacturer.
b. Hillyard Chemical Company.
c. ProSoCo, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -11
18JAN08
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance or work are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved. rrr�
Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Cementitious substrates shall have cured for 28 days minimum, and shall be clean. Oils, curing
compounds and other foreign and bond impairing substances shall be removed. Perform preparations
as necessary to render substrates suitable for bonding of materials to be adhered.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final reviewed
submittals for work, and instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers. Consult with
manufacturers for conditions not covered by printed instructions.
B. Standards: Meet requirements of applicable TCA and following ANSI Standards, except as otherwise
indicated:
1. Mortars:
a. Portland Cement Mortar (Thick Bed): ANSI A108.1.
b. Dry Set Mortar (Thin Bed): ANSI A108.5.
c. Epoxy Mortar: ANSI A108.6.
d. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A108.4.
2. Grouts:
a. Dry Set Grout: ANSI A108.10.
b. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A108.6.
C. Dry Set Grout: Type of dry set grout for tile joints shall be as follows, except as otherwise required:
1. Floors and Bases: Sanded dry set mortar.
2. Walls:
a. Non - sanded dry set grout when joints are less than 1/8 inch wide.
b. Sanded dry set grout when joints are 1/8 inch or more in width.
D. Extent: Extend work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering
without interruptions, except as required. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners
without disruption of pattern or joint alignments.
E. Intersections: Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling without marrying
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges abutting trim, finish, and built -in items for straight, aligned
joints. Fit work closely to electrical outlets, piping, and fixtures so that plates, collars, and covers overlap
work.
F. Mixing: Meet instructions of manufacturer for mixing and installation of materials.
a
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -12
18JAN08
• •
G. Substrate: Neutralize and seal substrates for mortar and adhesive as required by instructions of
manufacturer.
H. Installation Systems: Provide setting beds, leveling beds, bond coats and grouts as specked in various
Articles - Installation Systems, of this Section, for applicable substrate and location.
I. Waterproof and Anti- Fracture Membrane: Where waterproof membrane is required, install waterproof
membrane to provide total coverage and a watertight installation system. Meet instructions of
membrane manufacturer. Membrane shall include reinforcing fabric and shall be of 20 mil minimum
thickness as instructed by manufacturer for file type and condition of application. When required extend
membrane beyond perimeter of file area.
J. Latex Additives: Use appropriate type latex additives with dry materials meeting instructions and
recommendations of manufacturer. Use 100 percent latex additives; do not dilute or use with water,
except as otherwise specifically instructed for application in writing by manufacturer and as acceptable
to Architect.
K. Jointing Pattern: Lay the in grid pattern. Align joints with adjoining tiles on base, walls and trim, except
when otherwise required. Layout tile work and center file fields both directions in each space or on each
wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths.
1. Width of joints for tile shall be as follows, except as otherwise required:
a. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
b. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
c. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch.
d. Ceramic Paver Tile: 1/4 inch.
e. Ceramic Porcelain Paver Tile: 1/8 inch.
f. Terrazzo Paver Tile: 1/16 inch.
g. Quartz Ceramic Paver Tile: 1/8 inch.
h. Marble Paver Tile: 1/16 inch.
2. For tile mounted in sheets make joints between file sheets same width as joints within the sheets so
that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work.
3. Layout tile bases and wainscots to same dimensions as adjacent floor and wall tile, respectively.
L. Contact Area of Tiles: Obtain not less than 100 percent contact area for floor and wall tiles and
accessories.
M. Expansion and Control Joints:
1. Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including control, contraction, cold and
isolation joints, where indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings and locations recommended in TCA -
Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, and as acceptable to Architect.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to meet requirements of referenced standards and sealant
manufacturer.
N. Metal Edge Strips:
1. Provide edge strips of required profile where required or where edge of tile will be exposed or meets
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -13
18JAN08
Gr D
another material. Provide full length units. Install units straight, true, plumb and with top surface
flush with and matching adjacent tile work.
2. Anchor to substrate with integral flange under file with adhesive or mechanical fasteners as
applicable.
O. Marble Thresholds:
1. Provide where required or where surface of tile flooring meets another flooring which is not flush
with top of tile. Provide full length units.
2. Set thresholds meeting requirements of TCA System TH611. Use same installation system as
specified for adjacent file floor, except not less than bond coat of dry set mortar mixed with thin set
mortar latex additive, no water.
3.04 INSTALLATION SYSTEMS - INDOOR WALLS
A. General: Install tile using installation system applicable for substrate type and location as specified in
this Article.
B. Indoor Concrete Wall Substrate - General, Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System W202, modified thin set system, and ANSI A108.6 and ANSI A108.10.
a. Leveling Bed: Leveling bed as required by substrate of same materials as specified for bond
coat.
b. Bond Coat: Epoxy mortar.
c. Grout: Dry set grout, sanded, mixed with grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Grout for tile base which matches adjacent tile floor shall be as specified for tile floor. J
C. Masonry Wall Substrate - General, Non -Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System W202, modified thin set system.
a. Leveling Bed: Leveling bed as required by substrate of same materials as specified for bond
coat.
b. Bond Coat: Dry set mortar mixed with dry set mortar latex additive, no water.
c. Grout: Dry set grout mixed with dry set grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Grout for tile base which matches adjacent tile floor shall be as specified for tile floor.
D. Indoor Masonry Wall Substrate - General, Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System W202, modified thin set system, and ANSI A108.6 and ANSI A108.10.
a. Leveling Bed: Leveling bed as required by substrate of same materials as specified for bond
coat.
b. Bond Coat: Epoxy mortar.
c. Grout: Dry set grout, sanded, mixed with grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Grout for tile base which matches adjacent the floor shall be as specified for tile floor.
E. Masonry Wall Substrate -Shower and Wet Areas:
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -14
18JAN08
0 •
1. General: TCA System W202, modified thin set system.
a. Leveling Bed: Leveling bed as required by substrate and for waterproof membrane of same
materials as specified for bond coat.
b. Waterproof Membrane: After leveling coat is cured, applywaterproof membrane on leveling bed.
Apply membrane with total coverage. Extend membrane 6 inches minimum onto adjacent
surfaces required to receive file and interface with membrane for floor, unless otherwise
required.
c. Bond Coat: After waterproof membrane is cured, set file over membrane in dry set mortar mb ed
with dry set mortar latex additive, no water.
d. Grout: Dry set grout, non - sanded, mixed with grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Grout for tile base which matches adjacent the floor shall be as specified for tile floor.
F. Masonry Wall Substrate - Shower and Wet Areas:
1. General: TCA System 8414, modified thick set system, and ANSI A108.1 and ANSI Al 01.10.
a. Scratch Coat: Polyethylene cleavage membrane and reinforcing mesh with portland cement
mortar mixed with thick bed mortar latex additive, no water, keyed to reinforcing mesh.
b. Mortar Bed: 1 to 1 -3/4 inches thick portland cement mortar bed mixed with thick bed mortar
latex additive, no water.
c. Waterproofing Membrane: Apply waterproof membrane on mortar bed with total coverage.
Extend membrane 6 inches minimum onto adjacent walls required to receive tile and interface
with membrane for floor, unless otherwise required. Provide sealant in joint formed by
penetration, membrane and tile for watertight condition.
d. Bond Coat: Epoxy mortar.
e. Grout: Epoxy grout.
2. Base: Grout for tile base which matches adjacent tile floor shall be as specified for floor tile.
G. Gypsum Board Wall Substrate - General, Non -Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System W242, thin set system, and ANSI A108.4 and ANSI A108.10.
a. Bond Coat: Organic adhesive.
b. Grout: Dry set grout, mixed with dry set grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Grout for tile base which matches adjacent tile floor shall be as specked for the floor.
H. Indoor Plywood Wall Substrate - General Areas, Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System W244, modified thin set system and ANSI A108.6 and ANSI Al 08.10.
a. Bond Coat: Epoxy mortar.
b. Grout: Dry set mortar, sanded, mixed with grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Grout for file base which matches adjacent file floor shall be as specified for tile floor.
I. Portland Cement Board - Dry Areas for Support of 12" x 12" and Larger Tiles:
1. General: TCA System W243, modified thin set system.
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -15
18JAN08
G 4
a. Leveling Bed: Leveling bed as required by substrate of same materials as specified for bond
coat.
b. Bond Coat: Dry set mortar mixed with dry set mortar latex additive, no water.
c. Grout: Dry set grout, non - sanded, mixed with dry set grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Grout for tile base which matches adjacent the floor shall be as specified for tile floor.
J. Portland Cement Board -Shower and Wet Areas, Non -Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System W244, modified thin set system.
a. Leveling Bed: Leveling bed as required by substrate and for waterproof membrane of same
materials as specified for bond coat.
b. Waterproof Membrane: After leveling coat is cured, applywaterproof membrane on leveling bed.
Install membrane with continuous coverage. Extend membrane 6 inches minimum onto
adjacent surfaces required to receive file and interface with membrane for floor, unless
otherwise required.
c. Bond Coat: After waterproof membrane is cured, set file over membrane in dry set mortar mixed
with dry set mortar latex additive, no water.
d. Grout: Dry set grout, non - sanded, mixed with grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Grout for tile base which matches adjacent file floor shall be as specified for file floor.
K. Portland Cement Board Substrate - Tub Enclosures, Non -Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System 8412, modified thin set system, and ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6 and ANSI
108.10.
a. Waterproof and Anti- Fracture Membrane: Apply waterproof membrane on portland cement
board. Apply membrane with total coverage. Extend membrane 6 inches minimum onto adjacent
surfaces required to receive tile, unless otherwise required.
b. Bond Coat: Dry set mortar mixed with dry set mortar latex additive, no water.
c. Grout: Epoxy grout.
L. Indoor Reinforced Portland Cement Board - General, Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System W244, modified thin set system and ANSI A108.6 and ANSI A108.10.
a. Bond Coat: Epoxy mortar.
b. Grout: Dry set grout, sanded, mixed with grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Grout for tile base which matches adjacent tile floor shall be as specked for tile floor.
M. Wood Cement Board -Wet Areas, Non -Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System W244, modified thin set system.
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -16
18JAN08
0 •
a. Waterproof Membrane: Apply waterproof membrane on substrate. Install membrane with
continuous coverage. Extend membrane 6 inches minimum onto adjacent surfaces required to
receive the and interface with membrane for floor, unless otherwise required.
b. Bond Coat: After waterproof membrane is cured, set file over membrane in dryset mortar mixed
with thin bed mortar latex additive, no water.
c. Grout: Dry set grout, non - sanded, mixed with grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Grout for tile base which matches adjacent tile floor shall be as specified for file floor.
3.05 INSTALLATION SYSTEMS - INDOOR FLOORS
A. General: Install tile using installation system applicable for substrate type and location as specified in
this Article.
1. Install acoustic mat sound insulation and underlayment per manufacturer's recommendations in
area of file floor work prior to setting bed. Coordinate installation of in -floor heating system within file
setting bed.
B. Concrete Subfloor, On- Ground - General, Non -Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System F113, modified thin set system, and ANSI A108.5 and ANSI A108.10.
a. Bond Coat: Dry set mortar mixed with thin bed mortar latex additive, no water.
b. Grout: Dry set grout, sanded, mixed with grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Where file base is required, install using installation system specified for applicable substrate
and location of tie wall, except grout for tile base which matches adjacent floor tie, shall be as
specified in this system.
C. Concrete Subfloor, Suspended - General, Non -Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System F122, modified thin set system, and ANSI A108.5 and ANSI Al 08.10.
a. Waterproof and Anti- Fracture Membrane: Apply waterproof membrane on concrete subfloor.
Apply membrane with total coverage. Extend membrane 6 inches minimum onto adjacent
surfaces required to receive file, unless otherwise required.
b. Bond Coat: Dry set mortar mixed with dry set mortar latex additive, no water.
c. Grout: Dry set grout, sanded, mixed with dry set grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Where the base is required, install using installation system specified for applicable substrate
and location of file wall, except grout for tile base which matches adjacent floor tile, shall be as
specified in this system.
D. Concrete Subfloor, On- Ground - General Areas, Quarry and Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System F113, modified thin set system, and ANSI A108.5 and ANSI A108.10.
a. Bond Coat: Medium bed dry set mortar mixed with medium bed mortar latex additive, no water.
b. Grout: Dry set grout, sanded, mixed with grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Where tile base is required, install using installation system specified for applicable substrate
and location of tile wall, except grout for file base which matches adjacent floor tile, shall be as
specified in this system.
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -17
18JAN08
D 4
E. Indoor Concrete Subfloor, On- Ground - General, Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System F122, modified thin set system, and ANSI A108.5 and ANSI A108.10.
a. Waterproof and Anti- Fracture Membrane: Apply waterproof membrane on concrete slab. Apply
membrane with total coverage. Extend membrane 6 inches minimum onto adjacent surfaces
required to receive tile, unless otherwise required.
b. Bond Coat: Medium bed dry set mortar mixed with medium bed dry set mortar latex additive, no
water.
c. Grout: Dry set grout, sanded, mixed with dry set grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Where paver base is required, install using installation system specified for applicable
substrate and location of paver base, except grout for paver base which matches adjacent floor
paver, shall be as specified in this system.
F. Concrete Subfloor, On- Ground and Suspended - Shower Areas and Sloped Floors:
1. General: TCA System F111 and F122, modified thick set system, and ANSI A108.1, A108.5 and
Al 08.10.
a. Mortar Bed: Polyethylene cleavage membrane and 1 -1/4 to 2 inches thick reinforced portland
cement mortar bed mixed with thick bed mortar latex additive, no water. Provide slopes as
required.
b. Waterproof and Anti- Fracture Membrane: After mortar bed is cured, apply waterproof
membrane on mortar bed. Apply membrane with total coverage. Extend membrane 6 inches
minimum onto adjacent walls required to receive tile, unless otherwise required. 1J
c. Bond Coat: After waterproof membrane is cured, set tile over membrane in dry set mortar mixed
with dry set mortar latex additive, no water.
d. Grout: Dry set grout, sanded, mixed with dry set grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Where tile is required, install using installation system for applicable substrate and location of
tile wall, except grout for tile base which matches adjacent floor tile, shall be as specified in this
system.
G. Concrete Subfloor, On- Ground - General, Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System F113, modified thin set system, and ANSI A108.5 and ANSI A108.10.
a. Waterproof and Anti - Fracture Membrane: Apply waterproof membrane on concrete subfloor.
Apply membrane with total coverage. Extend membrane 6 inches minimum onto adjacent
surfaces required to receive tile, unless otherwise required.
b. Bond Coat: Medium bed dry set mortar mixed with medium bed mortar latex additive, no water.
c. Grout: Dry set grout, sanded, mixed with dry set grout latex additive, no water.
2. Base: Where paver base is required, install using installation system specified for applicable
substrate and location of paver base, except grout for paver base which matches adjacent floor
paver, shall be as specified in this system.
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -18
18JAN08
• i
I
ni
H. Concrete Floor Substrate - Food Serving, Non -Paver and Paver Tile:
1. Use Areas: Servery, catering and main aisle.
2. General: TCA Systems F114 and F111, modified thick set system with cleavage membrane.
a. Bed: Polyethylene cleavage membrane and 1 -1/4 to 2 inches thick reinforced portland cement
mortar bed mixed with thick bed mortar latex additive, no water.
b. Bond Coat: After mortar bed is cured, provide bond coat of dry set mortar mixed with thin bed
mortar latex additive, no water.
c. Grout: Epoxy grout.
3. Base: Where tie base is required, install using installation system specified for applicable substrate
and location of tile, except grout for file base which matches adjacent floor tie shall be as specified
in this system.
I. Concrete Subfloor, Suspended - Food Service, Paver Tile:
1. General: TCA System F131, modified thin set system, and ANSI A108.6 and ANSI Al 08.10.
a. Waterproof and Ant- Fracture Membrane: Apply waterproof membrane on concrete subfloor.
Apply membrane with total coverage. Extend membrane 6 inches minimum onto adjacent
surfaces required to receive tile, unless otherwise required.
b. Bond Coat: Epoxy mortar.
c. Grout: Epoxy grout.
d. Base: Where paver base is required, install using installation system specified for applicable
substrate and location of paver base, except grout for paver base which matches adjacent floor
paver, shall be as specified in this system.
J. Concrete Subfloor, On- Ground and Suspended Slabs - Shower and Wet Areas:
1. General: TCA System F111 and F122, modified thickset system, and ANSI A108.1, A108.5 and
A108.10
a. Mortar Bed: Polyethylene cleavage membrane and 1 -1/4 to 2 inches thick reinforced portland
cement mortar bed mixed with thick bed mortar latex additive, no water. Provide slopes as
required.
b. Waterproof and Anti - Fracture Membrane: Apply waterproof membrane on mortar bed with total
coverage. Extend membrane 6 inches minimum onto adjacent walls required to receive tile,
unless otherwise required. Provide polyurethane water immersion sealant in joint formed by
penetration, membrane and tie for watertight condition.
c. Bond Coat: Epoxy mortar.
d. Grout: Epoxy grout.
3
2. Base: Where the is required, install using installation system for applicable substrate and location of
file wall, except grout for file base which matches adjacent floor file, shall be as specified in this
TORCHIA
18JAN08
TILE
09300 -19
system.
K. Concrete Floor Substrate - Food Preparation Areas:
1. Use Areas: Kitchen and dishwashing.
2. Floor: TCA System F132 and F111, modified thick set system.
a. Bed: Polyethylene cleavage membrane and 1 -1/4 to 2 inches thick reinforced portland cement
mortar bed mixed with thick bed mortar latex additive, no water.
b. Bond Coat: After mortar bed is cured, provide bond coat of epoxy mortar.
c. Grout: Epoxy grout.
3. Base: Where tile base is required, install using installation system specified for applicable substrate
and location of tile, except grout for file base which matches adjacent floor tile shall be as specified
in this system.
L. Concrete Floor Substrate - Refrigerated Areas:
1. Use Areas: Walk -in refrigerators and freezers.
2. Floor: TCA System F131, modified thin set system.
a. Bond Coat: Epoxy mortar.
b. Grout: Epoxy grout.
3. Base: Where the base is required, install using installation system specified for applicable substrate
and location of tile, except grout for tile base which matches adjacent floor tile shall be as specified
in this system.
4. Sealant: After ceramic floor is completed and cured, provide a continuous bead of sealant having a
low module of elasticity in joint between top of base shape and wall of refrigerated area.
3.06 INSTALLATION SYSTEMS - CEILINGS
A. Portland Cement Board - Ceilings and Soffits:
1. General: TCA System C311, modified epoxy mortar system.
a. Leveling Bed: Leveling bed as required by substrate and for waterproof membrane of same
materials as specified for bond coat.
b. Waterproof Membrane - Shower and Wet Areas: After leveling coat is cured, apply waterproof
membrane on leveling bed. Install membrane with continuous coverage. Extend membrane 6
inches minimum onto adjacent surfaces required to receive tile and interface with membrane for
floor, unless otherwise required.
c. Bond Coat: After waterproof membrane is cured, set tile over membrane in epoxy mortar.
d. Grout: Epoxy Grout.
3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning:
TORCHIA TILE 09300 -20
18JAN08
1. Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean the surfaces free of foreign matter.
2. Protect adjacent metal surfaces, vitreous plumbing fixtures, and other surfaces and items from
effects of cleaning.
3. Clean file with neutral cleaner meeting instructions and recommendations of tile, groutand cleaner
manufacturer.
4. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
B. Sealer: After cleaning, seal file and grout, as applicable, with sealer meeting instruction of file, grout
and sealer manufacturer.
C. Protection:
1. Protect installed file to prevent damage and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tile floors for 7 days.
D. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded or
otherwise defective work.
E. Final Work: Before final inspection, remove protection and clean tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
it TORCHIA TILE 09300 -21
18JAN08
E
• •
TORCHIA ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 09510
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Description: Acoustical ceilings are indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary
and incidental to completion and performance of the work.
B. Included: Acoustical ceilings include, but are not limited to, following:
1. Suspension systems.
2. Acoustical units.
3. Furnishing acoustical ceiling suspension system partition attachment clip components for support of
partitions.
4. Sound attenuation blanket/batt insulation associated with acoustical ceilings.
5. Expansion joint covers or like assemblies associated with acoustical ceilings.
C. Schedule: Required types and applications of acoustical ceilings include, but are not limited to, systems
and applications specified in Article - Acoustical Ceiling Schedule, at end of this Section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. High Humidity Spaces: For acoustical ceiling purposes, high humidity spaces shall be:
1. Outdoor areas.
2. Areas directly adjacent to showers.
3. Locker Rooms
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the work:
1. AIMA - Standards for Terminology and Performance.
2. AIMA - Performance Data, Architectural Acoustical Materials.
3. ASTM D1779 - Specification for Adhesion for Acoustical Materials.
4. ASTM E580 - Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In
Panels in Areas requiring Seismic Restraint.
5. CISCA - Ceiling Systems Handbook.
6. CISCA - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice.
B. Performance Criteria:
1. General: Work shall meet performance criteria and like requirements indicated by Contract
Documents, including requirements specified in this Paragraph and in other parts of this Section with
normal maintenance as defined by printed product and maintenance data of manufacturer.
2. Performance Conditions: Performance of work shall include live loads, creep, shrinkage,
deflections, temperature variations, stresses, expansion and contraction requirements, seismic
forces, vibration, differential settlement and other like conditions meeting most stringent
requirements of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
TORCHIA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -1
18JAN08
performance of the work.
3. Fire Performance Characteristics:
a. General: Provide acoustical ceiling components that are identical to those tested for following
fire performance characteristics, meeting requirements of ASTM test method indicated, by UL or
other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
acoustical ceiling components with appropriate marking of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
b. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested by ASTM E84:
1) Flame Spread: 25 maximum.
2) Smoke Developed: 50 maximum.
c. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designation in UL Fire Resistance
Directory or FM - Approval Guide, for assemblies in which acoustical ceilings function as a fire
protective system; tested meeting requirements of ASTM E119. Provide protection materialsfor
lighting fixtures and air ducts meeting requirements indicated for rated system.
C. High Humidity Spaces: Acoustical ceiling materials and installation located in high humidity spaces shall
meet high humidity ceiling requirements specified in this Section.
D. Tolerances: Installed ceiling surfaces shall be within following:
1. Location Variation: 118 inch.
2. Level: Complete system with all supported loads, such as light fixtures, diffusers and like items
associated with ceiling, shall be within tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12' -0 ", and not exceed 1/4 inch 1J
cumulatively, any direction, and deflection of any component shall not exceed 0360 of span.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall specialize in performing work of this Section and have 5 years
minimum documented experience in detailing, installation and maintenanceof typeand qualityrequired
for work and shall be acceptable to manufacturer. Upon request, provide proof of qualifications.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and installation
instructions of manufacturer for each product. Include published data, certified conformance report or
certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating that each proposed product meets
requirements of Contract Documents. Include instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for
cleaning and refinishing acoustical units, including precautions against materials and methods which
may be detrimental to finishes and acoustical performance.
B. Reflected Ceilings Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to include following:
1. Locate metal edgings, cutouts and all mechanical and electrical work which will be exposed on
ceiling including, but not limited to, sprinkler heads, speakers, and framing for light fixtures, grilles,
diffusers and like items, and sound attenuation panels where required. Show direction of file pattern.
2. Locate center lines and work points in each room or area for other trades to work from.
TORCHIA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -2
18JAN08
• •
3. Spacing and fastening details of hangers and anchorage to supporting structures.
4. Splicing and attachment details for main and cross runners of suspension systems.
5. Splicing and attachment details for trims and moldings.
6. Revise reflected ceiling plan as required when field conditions caused revised dimensions or
alternate locations of fixtures or other exposed equipment.
C. Samples:
1. Acoustical Units: Submit sets of 12 inch square samples of each acoustical unit required. In each set
of samples show full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in the completed work.
Samples will be reviewed only for visual characteristics.
2. Suspension Systems: Submit 12 inch long samples of each exposed runner, molding and trim.
Samples will be reviewed only for visual characteristics.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver acoustical ceiling components to project site in original, unopened packages and store
them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct
sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.
B. Climate: Before installing acoustical ceiling components, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content.
C. Handling: Handle acoustical ceiling components carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in
any way.
D. Built -In- Items: Promptly deliver inserts and other supports required to be built -in supporting construction.
Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for installation of built -in items.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure: Do not install acoustical ceilings until space has been enclosed and is weatherproof,
wet -work in the space has been completed and is nominally dry, and until work above ceilings has been
completed, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at
values near those indicated for final occupancy. However, as minimum, maintain 60 to 85 degrees
Fahrenheit with 70 percent maximum relative humidity.
B. Lighting: Work area shall be illuminated during the installation at same level, or higher, as will be
available at final inspection.
C. Protection: Protect acoustical ceilings, including maintenance of temperature and humidity limitations,
and dust control, so that work will be without damage and deterioration at time of acceptance.
D. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceilings with other work supported by or
penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system
components and partition systems.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
TORCHIA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -3
18JAN08
A. Products: Furnish 2 percent of amount installed of each acoustical unit and suspension system. Furnish
full size units matching units installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with
appropriate labels.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. Types: Provide suspension systems for acoustical ceiling units of types and shapes required for
application.
2. Standard: Meet requirements of ASTM C635, as applicable for type of suspension system and
ceiling units required. Coordinate with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings,
including light fixtures; heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment, and partition systems.
3. Finishes and Colors:
a. General: Provide suspension systems to match appearance characteristics required or, if not
otherwise required, as selected by Architect from standard colors available from manufacturer.
b. High Humidity Finish: Meet requirements of ASTM C635, Coating Classification for Severe
Environment Performance, where high humidity finishes are required.
4. Hanger Anchorage Devices:
a. General: Anchorage devices applicable to required method of structural anchorage for ceiling
hangers and whose suitability for intended application has been proven through construction Ij
practices or by certified test data, except as otherwise required.
b. Anchor Fasteners: Expansion, chemical, cast -in -place and like anchor fasteners, fabricated
from corrosion resistant materials, with means for attaching hangers, and capable of sustaining
without failure a load equal to 5 times load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung, for
required structural classification, imposed by actual ceiling hanger, including items supported by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing, meeting requirements of ASTM E488 conducted
by an independent testing agency.
c. Actuated Fasteners: Powder, pneumatic and like power activated fasteners, fabricated from
corrosion resistant materials, with means for attaching hangers, and capable of sustaining
without failure a load equal to 10 times load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung, for
required structural classification, imposed by actual ceiling hanger, including items supported by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing meeting requirements of ASTM E1190 conducted
by an independent testing agency.
5. Hanger Wires:
a. General: Carbon steel, ASTM A641, soft temper, prestretched, Class 1 Coating, yield stress
load of 3 times minimum design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung for required
structural classification, but 12 gage (0.106 inch thick) minimum.
6. Moldings and Trim - Metal: Metal of types and profiles which provide finish edges at openings and
penetrations in ceiling and which correspond with edge detail of acoustical units and suspension
system as acceptable to Architect. Exposed metal edges shall be hemmed.
TORCHIA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -4
18JAN08
• 0
a. For lay -in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding which forms reveal of
same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension
member.
b. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide metal edge moldings fabricated to radius required to
fit penetration exactly. Formable plastic coated metal type moldings are not acceptable.
7. Hold -Down Clips: Retention clip system located on concealed side of ceiling system designed to
resist uplift forces, absorb impact forces against lay -in panels and prevent movement of lay -in
panels.
B. Suspension System SS -1:
1. Description:
a. Type: Direct hung, exposed inverted tee shape of double web steel and flat flange with one piece
flange cover, and cross tee interface of stepped end design, for general applications; non -fire
resistance rated, as applicable for required grid pattern dimensions.
b. Exposed Flanges: 9/16 inch wide for concealed edge or reveal edge installation of acoustical
panels.
c. Structural Classification: ASTM C635, Intermediate Duty System, with carrying capacity of Heavy
Duty System when hangers are spaced at 36 inch centers.
d. Metal: Cold rolled electro -zinc coated steel.
e. Finish: Factory painted. Color shall match acoustical panels as acceptable to Architect.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Same as acoustical panel manufacturers.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. General:
1. Types: Provide acoustical ceiling units of types and sizes required for application.
2. Standard:
a. General: Provide acoustical units of configurations required which are prepared for required
mounting method and which meet requirements of ASTM E1264, including requirements
indicated by reference for type, form, pattern, grade, NRC or NIC as applicable, light reflectance
coefficient, edge detail and joint detail.
b. Measuring NRC: Mounted on support meeting requirements of ASTM E795, Mounting Method
Type E -400.
3. Sound Attenuation Performance: Provide acoustical units with ratings for ceiling attenuation class
(CAC) or range required as determined meeting requirements of ASTM E1414, with ceilings
continuous at partitions and supported by a metal suspension system of type appropriate for ceiling
TORCHIA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -5
18JAN08
unit of configuration required; exposed for panels.
4. Light Reflections Performance: Provide acoustical units with coefficient for light reflectance as
determined meeting requirements of ASTM C523.
5. Colors, Textures and Patterns: Provide acoustical units to match appearance characteristics
required or, if not otherwise required, as selected by Architect from standard colors, surface textures
and patterns available from manufacturer.
B. Acoustical Panel AP -1:
1. Description:
a. Type: ASTM E1264, Type III, Form 1; modular mineral base lay -in panel, non -fire resistance
rated.
b. Pattern and Finish: Pattern Designation E, I and H; lightly textured embossed, white, factory
painted, scrubbable finish.
c. Performance:
1) NRC: 0.65 minimum.
2) CAC: 33 minimum.
3) Light Reflectance Coefficient: 0.83 minimum.
4) Surface Burning: Characteristics as specified.
d. Sizes: 24" x 24" x 3/4" thick and 24" x 48" x 3/4" thick as applicable for required suspension
system grid pattern.
e. Edge Details: As applicable for required acoustical ceiling:
1) Square Reveal: Square edge with kerf for exposed edge installation on flanges of exposed
suspension system.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Cirrus.
b. The Celotex Corporation, Sofetone Cashmere.
c. USG Interiors, Inc., Eclipse.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Tile Adhesive: ASTM D1779 and as instructed and recommended by tile manufacturer.
TORCHIA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -6
18JAN08
0 s
B. Acoustical Sealant: Meet requirements of Section 07920 - Joint Sealants.
C. Expansion Joint Covers: Provide expansion joint covers or like assemblies which are directly attached to
or associated with acoustical ceilings. Covers shall meet requirements for edge moldings and trim
specified in Article - Ceiling Suspension System, of this Section, and applicable requirements of Section
05810 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies. Furnish covers with factory painted finish to match adjacent
acoustical units.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets/Batts:
1. Description: Semi -rigid sound attenuation insulation without membrane facing produced by
combining mineral fibers with thermosetting resins; meeting requirements of ASTM C665, Type I,
recommended by manufacturer for maximum sound attenuation, and as follows:
a. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag or basaltic rock.
b. Density: 2.5 pounds per cubic foot maximum.
c. Thickness: 1 -1/2 inches.
d. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E136.
e. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50,
maximum, respectively.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville Corporation, Sound Attenuation Blankets.
b. Partek Insulations, Inc., Sound Attenuation Batts (SAB).
c. United States Gypsum Company, Thermafiber Sound and Fire Control Insulation (SAFB).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of the Contract Documents, as indicated byfinal reviewed
submittals for work, and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers.
B. Layout: Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of suspension systems and acoustical units to
balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width acoustical
units of borders. Meet with reflected ceiling plans.
C. Suspension Systems:
1. General: Install ceiling suspension systems to meet requirements of ASTM C636 and, when seismic
restraints are applicable, meet requirements of ASTM E580.
TORCHIA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -7
18JAN08
2. Supported Loads: Light fixtures, diffusers or like items associated with ceiling shall not be supported
from ceiling suspension system if weight of such items exceed capability of suspension system or if
tolerances of suspension system will be exceeded. In such cases, load shall be supported by
supplementary hangers or shall be independently supported.
3. Hanger Spacing:
a. Heavy Duty Suspension Systems: Space hangers for carrying channels or main runners of heavy
duty suspension systems at 4' -0" maximum centers to provide integrity of heavy duty suspension
system.
b. Intermediate Duty Suspension Systems: Space hangers for carrying channels or main runners of
intermediate duty suspension systems with load carrying capacity of heavy duty suspension
systems at 3' -0" maximum centers to provide integrity of heavy duty suspension system.
c. Ends: Locate hangers 6 inches maximum from ends of carrying channels or main runners.
4. Hangers: Suspended ceiling hangers from building structure.
a. Support hangers directly from building structural members. Do not support hangers from metal
deck, bracing; pipes, ducts, conduits and respective supports, and like items.
b. Install hangers plumb and free from contactwith insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where
required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying or
other equally effective means.
c. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that interfere with location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent
devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
required performance limits.
d. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to anchorage
devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a mannerthatwill not
cause anchorage devices and fasteners to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion,
elevated temperatures or vibration.
e. Secure flat, angle, channel and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not
cause hangers to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, elevated temperatures or vibration.
f. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
g. Wind Uplift: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Criteria.
h. Seismic Forces: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Criteria.
i. Vandalism: Provide additional framing to resist uplift from vandalism
j. Hanger Wire: Wire tie hanger wires to main runners or supports and twist at least 3 times to
develop full strength of wire.
TORCHIA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -8
18JAN08
• •
7
5. Main Runners: Join abutting sections of main runners with splices, interlocking ends, tab locks, pin
locks or other suitable connections to provide the following alignment between jointed sections:
a. Vertical and horizontal distance between exposed surfaces shall not be more than 0.015 inch.
b. Angular displacement of longitudinal axis shall not be visually apparent as acceptable to
Architect.
c. Horizontal gaps between exposed surfaces shall not be more than 0.02 inch.
6. Cross Runners: Support cross - runners by either main runners or by cross - runners classified as
main runners. When necessary, support supplementary runners by cross runners. Interlock ends
with supporting members to form 90 degree angle between intersecting runners with a spacing
tolerance as specified for main runners.
7. Pop Rivets: Use of pop rivets in exposed components of suspension system are not acceptable.
D. Adhered Tile:
1. Preparation: Clean surfaces to receive adhered tile free of dust and other substances that maybe
detrimental to file adhesion. Test moisture bearing substrates and prime surfaces meeting
instructions and recommendations of tile manufacturer.
2. Installation: Adhere the to substrate meeting requirements of CISCA reference standards. Install
splines in tile joints. Provide straight, aligned joints with files tightly butted together.
�3
E. Moldings and Trim:
1. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of each acoustical ceiling area, and at locations
where edge of acoustical units would otherwise be exposed after completion of the work.
2. Sealant Bed: Only where high humidity condition or sound attenuation blankettbatts are required,
apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concealed on back of vertical leg before installing
moldings.
3. Attachment: Secure moldings to building construction by fastening with screw anchors into
substrate, through holes drilled in vertical leg. Space holes 3 inches maximum from each end and
16 inches maximum on center along each molding. If use of fasteners is not possible, secure with
permanent adhesive. Use of pop rivets in exposed flanges or parts are not acceptable.
4. Tolerances: Level moldings with ceiling suspension system. Level tolerance shall be same as
required for suspension system.
5. Intersections: Miter corners and intersections of moldings accurately to provide hair -line joints with a
spacing tolerance as specified for main runners. Securely connect to prevent dislocation.
F. Expansion Joint Covers: Install suspension joint covers associated with acoustical ceilings meeting
applicable requirements of this Section for ceiling suspension system, moldings and trim, and
requirements of Section 05810 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies.
G. Acoustical Panels:
1. General: Install acoustical panels incoordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by
support of suspension system members and moldings, as applicable.
TORCHIA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
18JAN08
2. Orientation: Arrange acoustical panels and orientate any directionally patterned units in manner
indicated on Drawings or directed by Architect.
3. Penetrations: Scribe and cut acoustical panels to fit accurately at non - modular spaces in suspension
system and at penetrations.
4. Touch -Up: Paint cut edges of panels to be exposed. Match color of exposed panel surfaces using
coating recommended by panel manufacturer.
5. Equipment Clips: Install light fixture clips at each corner of each light fixture, and similarly install
appropriate type clips at diffusers and other such items supported by ceiling suspension system.
6. Hold Down Clips:
a. Provide hold down clips for each acoustical panel where either of following conditions occur:
1) Weight of panel is less than 1 pound per square foot.
2) Space above ceiling is used as an air plenum.
3) Ceiling is located in a high humidity space.
4) Ceiling is located in building entrance vestibule or outdoor location.
5) Required by governing regulations or for fire resistance ratings.
6) As instructed or recommended by panel manufacturer.
b. Install hold down clips on cross runners spaced 2 feet on center, except do not exceed spacing
required by governing authorities or fire resistance ratings, or as instructed or recommended by
panel manufacturer.
H. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Install sound attenuation blankets/batts over acoustical ceiling areas where
required. Provide two equal thickness layers of blankets/batts, of total thickness required, except weight
shall not exceed 0.75 psf. Lay first layer of insulation directly on ceiling system and lay second layer of
insulation on first layer with joints between layers staggered 12 inches minimum. Lay blankets/batts over
interrupting items. Do not lay blankets/batts over light fixtures, unless light fixtures are rated for such
coverage. Tightly fit blankets/batts together and to adjacent construction. Close openings to provide
complete coverage.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including suspension system members, moldings, trim
and acoustical units. Meet instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for cleaning and
touch -up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and
repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
TORCHIA ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -10
18JAN08
I-
TORCHIA ASSOCIATES, INC.
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
SECTION 09624
RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING
A. Description: Resilient athletic surfacing is indicated by Contract Documents and shall include
work necessary and incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
B. Included: Resilient athletic surfacing includes, but is not limited to, following:
1. Sports Surface: Locker area flooring.
C. Applications: Required applications of resilient athletic surfacing include, but are not limited to,
following:
1. Sports Surface: Locker floor area.
D. Related Work:
1. Concrete substrate.
2. Wood lockers.
n
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Responsibility: Work shall be performed by a single resilient athletic surfacing installer
having undivided responsibility for providing each category of complete resilient athletic surfacing
and for performance of the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer for resilient athletic surfacing shall have 5 years minimum
documented experience in installation of quality and type of resilient athletic surfacing required
and shall be acceptable to manufacturer.
C. Coordination: Inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work and work of this
Section, including electrical services, shall be flush with finished surface of resilient athletic
surfacing.
D. Pre - Installation Meeting: Conduct a pre - installation meeting at project site prior to starting work at
project site and delivery of products to review conditions associated with performing work.
Meeting shall include review of construction conditions, substrate conditions, environmental
conditions, ambient conditions and coordination required for installation of work. Meeting
participants shall include Architect, representative of manufacturer, installer of work under this
Section and installers of related work. Record discussions of meeting, and agreements and
disagreements reached, and furnish a copy of record to each participant.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and
installation instructions of manufacturer for each product. Include published data, certified
conformance report or certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating each
proposed product meets requirements of Contract Documents
TORCHIA RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING
18JAN08
1�
09624 -1
D O
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of resilient athletic
surfacing. Include layout arrangement of sheet materials showing location of all joints, general
installation details and data, details where resilient athletic surfacing contacts another type
flooring or other construction, and other pertinent details, requirements and data.
C. Samples: Submit samples of colors and thickness of specified products.
D. Maintenance Literature: Submit maintenance instructions for flooring.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Store materials prior to installation, condition space and substrate
for installation and maintain space after installation of resilient athletic surfacing at temperature
and relative humidity meeting instructions and recommendations of manufacturer.
B. Protection: Provide temporary protective covering over installed resilient athletic surfacing.
Temporary protective covering shall prevent damage to flooring from installation of other work.
C. Sequencing: Do not deliver resilient athletic surfacing materials until required for installation.
Resilient athletic surfacing shall not be installed until other room construction and finishes,
including doors, finish hardware, painting, athletic equipment, mechanical work, and lighting and
electrical services, are completely installed.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranty work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except warranty shall
include additional requirements specified in this Article.
B. Costs: Warranty shall be without cost limitation and at no expense to Owner.
C. Signatures: Warranty shall be signed by Contractor, installer and manufacturer.
D. Time Period: Extend warranty time period to 3 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Tuflex
1. Sport Surface: Spartus 27" x 27 ".
2. Adhesive: TA 10, TA 20/30 Urethane.
2.02 PREFABRICATED RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING
A. Sports Surface Sheeting:
1. Composition: Two separate layers, upper layer and lower layer, vulcanized together. Each
layer shall be calendered and vulcanized with a base of material rubber, synthetic rubber, fine
mineral filters, stabilizing agents and pigmentation.
2. Properties: Physical properties, width and length shall be as specified elsewhere in this
TORCHIA RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING 09624 -2
18JAN08
0 0
Article. Shore hardness of lower layer shall be less than upper layer and as recommended by
i manufacturer for application within limits specified.
3. Thickness: 3/8 inch.
4. Surface Texture: Hammered finish.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from standard colors of manufacturer.
B. Physical Properties: Sheeting materials shall meet following respective requirements:
Multipurpose
Surface
1. Hardness, Upper Layer
! 11
6. VOC Compliance
Shore A
Between 72 and 78
(ASTM D2240)
2.
72 CRITICAL
7. Color Stability
Good
(RADIANT FLUX)
0.94w /cm Class 1
3.
Static Load Limit
(ASTM F970)
50.004 inch
4.
Fungal Resistance Test
(ASTM 621 -90)
No Growth
5.
Coefficient of
Friction
(ASTM D2047)
0.9 minimum
6. VOC Compliance
Yes
(ASTM D5116)
Resistance to
Chemical Agents
Good
7. Color Stability
Good
8. Light Reflection
Average
2.03 ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive shall be a two part polyurethane or epoxy base formulation suitable for adherence of
sheet goods to substrate as recommended and furnished by resilient athletic surfacing
manufacturer.
B. Adhesive formulation to permit addition of inert filler to correct minor substrate variations. Inert
filler shall be furnished by resilient athletic surfacing manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
TORCHIA RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING
18JAN08
09624 -3
� 4
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of
work are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
resolved. Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
B. Acceptable Conditions:
1. Concrete substrate shall be level and true. Variations greater than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, any
direction, are not acceptable.
2. Inserts, penetrations and other construction items which affect installation of resilient athletic
surfacing shall be in place.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install resilient athletic surfacing work to meet requirements of Contract Documents and
instructions, recommended tolerances and recommended procedures of manufacturer, and as
indicated by final reviewed submittals for the Work.
B. Installation: Adhere resilient athletic surfacing sheeting material with adhesive applied meeting
instructions and recommendations of manufacturer. Use only proven installation techniques
which insure flooring meets requirements of Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
1E
TORCHIA RESILIENT ATHLETIC SURFACING 09624 -4
18JAN08
TORCHIA ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 09640
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS WOOD FLOORING
0
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings
and Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Wood flooring is indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary
and incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
C. Included: Wood flooring includes, but is not limited to, following:
1. Factory finished wood flooring.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Forest Certification: Provide wood flooring produced from wood obtained from forests certified by
an FSC accredited certification body meeting requirements of FSC 1.2 - Principles and Criteria.
B. Hardwood Flooring: Meet requirements of NOFMA's - Official Flooring Grading Rules for species,
grade and cut.
1. Certification: Provide flooring that carries NOFMA grade stamp on each bundle or piece.
C. Mockups: Install mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. To set quality standards for installation, install mockup of floor area in 3 model apartments.
2. To set quality standards for sanding and application of field finishes, prepare finish mockup of
floor area as shown on Drawings.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details including location and layout of each type of wood
flooring and accessory.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer color charts showing full range of colors and finishes
available for wood flooring.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of wood flooring and accessory, with stain color and finish
required, approximately 12 inches long and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work
and showing the full range of normal color and texture variations expected.
TORCHIA WOOD FLOORING 09640 -1
18JAN08
1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles.
B. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after concrete,
masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet work is complete and dry.
C. Store wood flooring materials in a dry, warm, ventilated, weathertight location.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning period begins not less than 7 days before wood flooring installation, is continuous
through installation, and continues not less than 7 days after wood flooring installation.
1. Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 degrees
Fahrenheit and relative humidity planned for building occupants in spaces to receive wood
flooring during conditioning period.
2. Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, no later
than beginning of conditioning period.
a. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to relative humidity of, and is at same temperature as,
space where it is to be installed.
b. Open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize immediately on moving flooring
into spaces in which it will be installed.
B. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building
occupants.
C. Install factory finished wood flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Wood Flooring: Equal to 1 percent of amount installed for each type of wood flooring indicated.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 FACTORY FINISHED WOOD FLOORING
A. Engineered Wood - Plank Flooring:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Species: Wire brushed Ash.
Thickness: 9/16 inch.
Construction: Seven ply.
Width: 6 inch.
Length: Manufacturer standard.
Edge Style: Micro bevel.
Finish: UV urethane, satin, semi - gloss, high gloss.
To be selected by Owner.
TORCHIA WOOD FLOORING 09640 -2
18JAN08
D
E
8. Acceptable Products:
Is a. Arrigoni Woods: Mocca
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Underlayment: Dodge Regupol QT 3006 rbm, 1" self - leveling gypsum concrete topping.
B. Wood Flooring Adhesive and Underlayment Adhesive: Mastic recommended by flooring,
underlayment and adhesive manufacturers for application indicated.
C. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex modified, hydraulic cement based
formulation approved by wood flooring manufacturer.
D. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer.
E. Hardwood Edges and transitions: In same species and grade as wood flooring.
1. Threshold: Tapered on each side and routed at bottom of one side to accommodate wood
flooring.
2. Reducer Strip: 2 inches wide, tapered on one side, and in thickness matching wood flooring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
j 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance
of wood flooring.
1. Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other
Sections.
2. For adhesively applied wood flooring, verify that substrates are free of cracks, ridges,
depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient
products.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Substrate Moisture Testing, General: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer or, if none,
comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's - Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring.
1. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C. Concrete Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test meeting requirements of
ASTM F1869, as follows:
1. Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 square feet and perform not less
than 2 tests in each installation area with test areas evenly spaced in installation area.
TORCHIA WOOD FLOORING 09640 -3
18JAN08
2. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture vapor emission rate of
3 lb of water /1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
3. Perform alkalinity and adhesion tests recommended in writing by manufacturer or, if none,
according to NWFXs - Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring. Proceed with installation only
after substrates pass testing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Grind high spots and fill low spots on concrete substrates to produce a maximum 1/8 inch
deviation in any direction when checked with a 10 foot straightedge.
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes and depressions in substrates.
B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances on substrates that are
incompatible with installation adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using
mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
C. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final
reviewed submittals for work, and meeting instructions and recommendations of product
manufacturers.
B. Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of not less
than 3/4 inch as required by manufacturer.
C. Engineered Wood Flooring: Set in adhesive meeting instructions and recommendations of
manufacturer and underlayment manufacturer.
D. Wood Trim: Nail baseboard to wall and nail shoe molding or other trim to baseboard; do not nail
to flooring.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of heavy kraft
paper or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might cause condensation.
1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over kraft paper covered wood flooring. Protect
flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects
over flooring.
I;QNI ]JM *9119121
TORCHIA WOOD FLOORING 09640 -4 13
18JAN08
•
•
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL, INC. SECTION 09650
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and
Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Resilient flooring is indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary and
incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
C. Types: Required types of resilient flooring include, but are not limited to, following:
1. Tile flooring.
2. Wall base.
3. Edge strips.
4. Detectable units.
5. Accessories.
6. Preparation and acceptance of substrate and all means for installation to commence and be
successful.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. USDOJ -Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
3. Handicapped people accessibility codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. General: Work shall meet performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents, including
requirements specified in this Paragraph and in other parts of this Section, with manual maintenance
as defined by product and maintenance data of manufacturer.
2. Fire Performance Characteristics: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance
Requirements.
3. Slip Resistance: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements.
4. Accessibility Standards: Meet requirements of Section 01415 -Performance Requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualifications: Provide products indicated under same category, including accessories
produced by single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, leveling
compounds and edging strips. Use only one type, brand, source and manufacture run of each product.
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -1
18JAN08
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall specialize in performing work of this Section and have 5 years
minimum documented experience in installation and maintenance of extent, type and quality required
for work and shall be acceptable to manufacturer.
C. Moisture and Bond Tests: Perform moisture and bond tests on concrete subfloor to determine dryness
prior to installation.
1. Moisture Condition: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test meeting requirements of ASTM F1869
in each major area, one test minimum per 1,000 square feet per 24 hour day. Results of test shall
be 3 pounds of water maximum per 1,000 square feet per 24 hour day. Also, perform substrate
moisture tests instructed or recommended by manufacturer.
2. Adhesive Bond: Perform adhesive bond test in each major area, one test minimum per 1,000
square feet per 24 hour day. After 72 hours, examine bond condition to determine bond is solid and
no moisture is evident.
3. Conclusion: Do not proceed with installation of materials until test results meet specked
requirements and are acceptable to manufacturer of flooring materials.
D. Pre - Installation Meeting: Conduct a pre - installation meeting at project site prior to starting work at
project site and delivery of products to review conditions associated with performing work. Meeting shall
include review of construction conditions, substrate conditions, environmental requirements, ambient
conditions, and coordination required for installation of work. Meeting participants shall include
Architect, representatives of manufacturers, installer of work under this Section and installers of related
work. Record discussions of meeting, and agreements and disagreements reached, and furnish a copy
of record to each participant within 3 working days.
E. Manufacturer Representative: Provide services of a trained technical representative of product
manufacturer to advise on every phase of work and to perform other like services at project site as
necessary. As a minimum, provide full -time attendance at start of installation and thereafter to provide
technical assistance to installer as may be required. Representative shall give preparation, instructions,
examine substrates before installation and examine completed installation.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and installation
instructions of manufacturer for each product. Include published data, certified conformance report or
certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating each proposed product meets
requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Samples: Submit samples of each type, pattern, color and finish of resilient flooring and accessory
required. Provide full size tile units and 12 inch square samples of sheet flooring and 6 inch long
samples of accessories. Include full range of flooring color and pattern variation. Sample submittals
will be reviewed for color, texture and pattern only.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for installation of work. Include plans at 1/4 inch scale, and
detail plans at 3/4 inch scale and detail sections at full scale. Indicate requirements, joints and details
for layout arrangement and dimensions of work, and for performance, and other pertinent data not
included in submitted product data.
D. Certification - Fire Test Performance: Submit certification issued by manufacturer, attesting resilient
meets fire test performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents.
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -2
18JAN08
•
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver products to project site in original, unopened containers, with labels indicating product,
pattern, gage, manufacturer name, lot number, sequence of manufacture, shipping and handling
instructions.
B. Storage: Carefully handle products and store in original containers in dry spaces protected from
weather with ambient temperature as instructed by manufacturer, but within range of 70 and 80 degrees
Fahrenheit 48 hours minimum before start of installation.
1. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move materials and installation accessories into spaces where materials
will be installed.
2. Stack all boxes of each pattern and color in sequence as numbered by factory no higher than
packaging can support.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temperature:
1. Space: Maintain ambient temperature as instructed by manufacturer, but within range of 70 and 85
degrees Fahrenheit in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation,
during installation, and for 48 hours minimum after installation. Subsequently, maintain ambient
temperature as instructed by manufacturer, but within range of 55 and 95 degrees Fahrenheit in
areas where work is completed.
2. Resilient Units: Do not install resilient units until units are same temperature as space where units
are to be installed.
B. Lighting: During installation of resilient flooring and accessories, work area shall be illuminated, at same
level, or higher, as will be available at final inspection.
C. Traffic: Close spaces to traffic during file installation.
D. Sequencing: Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting,
have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until concrete is cured and
sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by bond and moisture test specked and
acceptable to manufacturer.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Data: Submit maintenance data and instructions for maintenance practices for each type resilient
flooring and accessory.
B. Instructions: Instruct personnel designated by Owner on flooring manufacturer recommended short and
long term maintenance procedures for products installed. Provide manufacturer written data to support
instructions.
C. Products: Provide following products for maintenance products from same manufactured lot as
materials installed:
1. Tile Flooring: Not less than 2 percent of square footage, nearest to full container, for each type,
size, and color installed.
2. Accessory Units: Not less than 5 percent of linear footage, nearest to full container, for each type,
size and color installed.
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -3
18JAN08
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. General: Provide colors and patterns of resilient flooring and accessories as selected byArchitect from
complete range of standard and standard custom colors and patterns of manufacturer. Variation in
shades and pattern matches between containers of like products is not acceptable.
B. Tile: Provide units with uniformly distributed color and pattern, except as otherwise indicated by
Contract Documents.
2.02 TILE FLOORING
A. Vinyl Composition Tile - Normal:
1. Description: ASTM F1066, Class 2, vinyl composition, asbestos free, color and pattern throughout
thickness of tile.
a. Size: 12" x 12"x 1/8" thick.
b. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
c. Finish: Matte sheen.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Azrock Industries, Inc.
c. Mannington, Inc.
d. Tarkett, Inc.
e. Vinyl Plastics, Inc.
B. Raised Profile Rubber Tile:
1. Description: ASTM F1344, Class IA, solid homogeneous rubber, integral color, sanded back.
a. Size: 39" x39" x 0.14" base thickness and 0.16 total thickness.
b. Surface: Raised profile of approximately 1 inch diameter by 0.02 inch high discs or studs
arranged in a uniform and symmetrical pattern.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
2.03 FLOORING ACCESSORIES
A. Vinyl Base:
1. Description: ASTM F1861, Type TV, Group 1, polyvinyl chloride, coextruded.
a. Height: 4 inches, except as otherwise required.
b. Thickness: 1/8 inch gage.
c. Length: Continuous coils, single piece for each application run less than 90 feet.
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -4
18JAN08
1
J
d. Style:
1) Standard top set cove over tile and sheet.
2) Straight base without cove, where carpet is required.
e. Comers: Project site formed corners and ends matching base.
f. Surface: Smooth.
g. Finish: Matte sheen.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Azrock Industries, Inc.
c. Mannington, Inc.
d. Tarkett, Inc.
e. Vinyl Plastics, Inc.
B. Rubber Base:
1. Description: ASTM F1861, Type TS, Group 1, solid homogeneous rubber, integral color.
a. Height: 4 inches.
b. Thickness: 1/8 inch gage.
c. Length: Continuous coils, single piece for each application run less than 90 feet.
d. Style:
1) Standard top -set cove over tile and sheet.
2) Straight base without cove, where carpet is required.
e. Corners: Project site formed corners and ends matching base.
f. Surface: Smooth.
g. Finish: Matte sheen.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
C. Resilient Edge Strips:
1. Description: Homogenous vinyl or rubber composition matching composition of adjacent resilient
flooring where possible.
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -5
18JAN08
C+ O
a. Edge Profile: Tapered or bullnosed.
b. Size: One inch minimum width and same thickness as adjacent resilient flooring.
c. Color: Match adjacent resilient flooring or as selected by Architect from standard color range of
manufacturer.
d. Application: Provide at edges of resilient flooring where edge is exposed, except as otherwise
indicated by Contract Documents.
2. Acceptable Products: As furnished by resilient flooring manufacturer.
D. Detectable Warning Accessories:
1. Description: Homogeneous composition of polyvinyl chloride and integral color unit meeting
handicapped accessibility performance requirements specified in this Section.
a. Size: Match adjacent resilient flooring, otherwise 1/8 inch minimum thickness exclusive of any
detectable pattern.
b. Surface: Pre - grooved pattern surface meeting handicapped accessibility requirements.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Johnsonite, Inc.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Leveling and Patching Compound:
1. Description: Styrene- butadiene or acrylic latex modified portland cement meeting instructions and
recommendations of resilient flooring manufacturer.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. The W. W. Henry Company, Number 345, Floor Underlayment Product.
b. Sonneborn Building Products, Sonopatch 200.
c. Tamms Industries, Inc., Thin Patch.
d. Thoro System Products, Thoro Underlayment - Trowel Grade.
B. Concrete Slab Primer: Non - staining formulation compatible with adhesives as instructed and
recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer.
C. Adhesives: Water resistant, stabilized type as instructed and recommended by resilient flooring or
accessory manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions.
D. Cleaning Solution: Dilute natural detergent solution acceptable to manufacturer of resilient flooring.
E. Floor Polish: Commercial floor polish recommended by manufacturer of resilient flooring.
F. Sealer: Product acceptable to manufacturer of polish and compatible with work.
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -6
18JAN08
0 0
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of workare
satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
B. Testing: Prior to application of any resilient flooring material perform moisture and bond tests as
specified in Article - Quality Assurance, of this Section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Substrate:
1. Prepare existing substrates as necessary for correct installation and performance of new resilient
flooring, with no telegraphing of substrate conditions to surface of resilient flooring material.
2. Prior to laying flooring, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor.
3. Subfloor surfaces shall be smooth, at required finish elevation and within level tolerances required
by Contract Documents, but not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet variation, non - cumulative from
required level or slopes.
4. Use leveling and patching compound for filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors.
5. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine concrete surfaces are sufficiently
cured, dried and ready to receive flooring.
6. Apply primer to cementitious surfaces as instructed and recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive.
B. Patching and Leveling:
1. Preparation:
a. Keyed Edges: Juncture of flooring to adjacent floor surfaces, drains and like conditions shall be
free from abrupt transitions. Provide transition key at edges of flooring, except as otherwise
indicated by Contract Documents, which shall be of detail to be resistant to impact from traffic
which flooring is required to resist. Neatly saw cut substrate to minimum depth equal to required
thickness of flooring and chip out at an angle to 4 inches horizontal on inside of area to receive
flooring. Uniformly slope and feather underlayment to edges of flooring as required for
conditions. Line of juncture and edges shall be true to line and straight. Perform keying work
prior to final surface preparation.
b. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean entire floor surface; removing debris and dust.
2. Patching: Patch substrates, fill holes and depressions in substrates and provide underlayment over
substrates as required to provide a level and uniform substrate for flooring as instructed and
recommended by flooring manufacturer: Finish surface tolerance shall be as follows:
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -7
18JAN08
AMN
a. General: 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/16 inch, maximum deviation under a 10 foot straightedge in
any direction meeting requirements of ACI 302, non - cumulative.
b. Toilet Rooms: 1/8 inch, plus or minus 1/32 inch, maximum deviation under a 10 foot
straightedge in any direction meeting requirements of ACI 302, non - cumulative.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. General:
1. Install resilient flooring and accessories meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated
by final reviewed submittals for work, and meeting instructions, recommendations and
recommended tolerances and procedures of product manufacturer.
2. Install resilient flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and
permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature
and relative humidity shall be within limits specified in Part 1 of this Section and as instructed and
recommended by manufacturer.
3. Where operable partitions are to be provided, install flooring before partitions are installed.
4. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door or opening, terminate flooring under
centerline of door or centerline of opening as applicable, except if otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Install flooring using method meeting instructions and recommendations of manufacturer. Butt resilient
flooring tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edgings. Scribe flooring to walls, columns,
outlets and other appurtenances, and around obstructions producing neat joints, laid tight, even and
straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals and into closets and similar openings.
C. Maintain reference markers, holes or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use non - permanent marking device.
D. Install flooring on covers for communication and electrical ducts, and other such items as occur within
finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed in
these covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers.
E. Tightly cement flooring to substrate without open joints and cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Joints between flooring units,
and between flooring units and adjacent work shall be hairline.
3.04 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING
A. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tile atopposite
edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at
room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and
packaged. Cut tile neatly to and around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed file are not
acceptable.
C. Lay tile in stack bond checkerboard pattern, orientated with pattern of each tile at 90 degrees to
adjacent tile, one corner of each of four adjacent tiles at one point.
D. Hand roll tiled area to assure adhesion when recommended by manufacturer.
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -8
18JAN08
0 0
3.05 INSTALLATION -ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Base:
1. General: Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanentfxtures in
spaces where base is required. Install base in as long lengths as practicable with comers fabricated
from base materials. Tightly bond base to backing throughout length of each piece, with continuous
contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. Do not stretch base material during construction.
a. Provide job formed corners heat formed without reduction or other deformation of cove
configuration. Preformed corner units are not acceptable.
b. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular surfaces, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall
base with adhesive filler material as instructed and recommended by manufacturer.
2. Job - Formed Comers:
a. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Heat form without
deformation and producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points
where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough
to produce a snug fit without removing more than half wall base thickness. Heat form.
b. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting (coping) an
inverted V- shaped notch in toe of wall base at point where comer is formed or miter base units.
Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. Heat form.
B. Stair Treads: Install resilient stair treads meeting instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for
type of stair substrate. Securely anchor treads to substrate. Fill any voids between units, and between
units and adjacent construction using material recommended by manufacturer.
C. Stair Nosings: Install resilient stair nosings meeting instructions and recommendations of manufacturer
for type of stair nosing substrate. Securely anchor nosings to substrate. Fill any voids between units,
and between units and adjacent construction using material recommended by manufacturer.
D. Resilient Edge Strips: Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to resilient flooring and secure with
adhesive. Install edging strips at all exposed or unprotected edges of flooring.
E. Detectable Warning Accessories: Install detectable warning accessories tightly butted to adjacent
resilient flooring and secure with adhesive.
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning -Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring:
1. Initial Cleaning: Unless otherwise instructed or recommended by manufacturer:
a. Sweep and vacuum thoroughly.
b. Do not wash floor for a minimum of 5 days after installation to prevent excess moisture from
interfering with adhesive bond. Remove excess adhesive. Floor maybe cleaned after installation
by damp mopping with very dilute neutral detergent solution while carefully scrubbing black
marks and excessive soil. Do not flood surfaces. Allow solution to stand or soak for 5 minutes,
agitate with mop, then remove with a mop or wet vacuum. Rinse with clear water and remove
with mop or wet vacuum. Damp mop with clear water to remove residual spots and streaks.
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -9
18JAN08
C: O
c. Asa temporary measure apply a minimum of 2 coats of high quality commercial floor polish to
protect floor until regular maintenance procedures begin.
2. Protection: Protect floor from traffic, damage and deterioration until final completion.
3. Preparation for Traffic: Scrub floor with neutral detergent solution using floor machine
recommended by flooring manufacturer. When floor is badly soiled and scratched, strip floor
meeting instructions of manufacturer. When floor is thoroughly clean and dry, apply floor polish and,
when recommended by polish manufacturer, a sealer. Allowfinishes to dry priorto being subjected
to traffic and other use as recommended by polish manufacturer. Surfaces shall not exceed
specified slip resistance.
B. Cleaning - Solid Homogeneous Vinyl Sheet Flooring:
1. Initial Cleaning: Unless otherwise instructed or recommended by manufacturer:
a. Sweep and vacuum thoroughly.
Do not wash floor for a minimum of 5 days after installation to prevent excess moisture from
interfering with adhesive bond. Remove excess adhesive. Floor may be cleaned after
installation by damp mopping with very dilute neutral detergent solution while carefully scrubbing
black marks and excessive soil. Do not flood surfaces. Allow solution to stand or soak for 5
minutes, agitate with mop, then remove with a mop or wet vacuum. Rinse with clear water and
remove with mop or wet vacuum. Damp mop with clear water to remove residual spots and
streaks.
c. Asa temporary measure apply a minimum of 2 coats of high quality floor polish to protect floor
until regular maintenance procedures begin.
2. Protection: Protect floor from traffic, damage and deterioration until final completion.
3. Preparation for Traffic:
a. Strip meeting instructions and recommendations of manufacturer. Thoroughly rinse and allow to
dry. When floor is thoroughly clean and dry, apply three to five coats of floor polish and, when
recommended by polish manufacturer, a sealer. Allow finishes to dry prior to traffic and other
use as recommended by polish manufacturer. Surfaces shall not exceed specified slip
resistance.
b. Where polish is not permitted by use, burnish thoroughly cleaned unpolished surface in
accordance with flooring manufacturer recommendations.
C. Cleaning - Rubber Tile Flooring and Stair Treads:
1. Initial Cleaning: Unless otherwise instructed or recommended by manufacturer:
a. Sweep and vacuum thoroughly.
b. Do not wash floor for a minimum of 5 days after installation to prevent excess moisture from
interfering with adhesive bond. Remove excess adhesive. Floor may be cleaned after
installation by damp mopping with very dilute neutral detergent solution while carefully scrubbing
black marks and excessive soil. Do not flood surfaces. Allow solution to stand or soak for 5
minutes, agitate with mop, then remove with a mop or wet vacuum. Rinse with clear water and
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -10
18JAN08
i •
remove with mop or wet vacuum. Damp mop with clear water to remove residual spots and
streaks.
2. Protection: Protect floor from traffic, damage and deterioration until final completion.
3. Preparation for Traffic: Apply a neutral solution which contains a small amount of synthetic waxor
waxlike additive at dilution rate recommended by manufacturer. Allow solution to stand or soak for 5
minutes, agitate with mop, then remove with a mop or wet vacuum. Do not rinse. For extremely
soiled areas or areas with ground in dirt, use soft nylon brush or pad in agitation. When dry, buff
surfaces to uniform luster with soft buffing brush or pad. Surfaces shall not exceed specked slip
resistance.
END OF SECTION
M-
AESI 27210 RESILIENT FLOORING
18JAN08
09650 -11
G O